www.siemens.com/drives
Medium-Voltage Drive
SINAMICS GM150
Type 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Edition 04/2017
20.04.2017 13:31
V27.00
Medium-Voltage Drive
SINAMICS GM150
Type 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Edition 04/2017
Introduction 1
Safety instructions 2
Description 3
Preparations for use 4
Installation 5
Electrical connection 6
Start-up 7
Operation 8
Maintenance 9
Spare parts 10
Disposal 11
Service & Support A
Technical data and drawings B
Checklists and forms C
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Document order number: MUSTER_Diodestack
Ⓟ 04/2017 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2006, -, 2017.
All rights reserved
Table of contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................17
1.1 About these instructions.........................................................................................................17
2 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................................19
2.1 Warning symbol on the device...............................................................................................19
2.2 Qualified personnel................................................................................................................19
2.3 The five safety rules...............................................................................................................19
2.4 Safe handling.........................................................................................................................20
2.5 Electromagnetic fields in electrical power engineering installations ......................................23
2.6 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)...................................24
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation...............................25
2.7.1 Proper usage..........................................................................................................................25
2.7.2 Security information...............................................................................................................26
2.7.3 Grounding concept.................................................................................................................27
2.7.4 Installation site safety.............................................................................................................27
2.7.5 Measures for operator protection in electromagnetic fields...................................................28
2.8 Residual risks.........................................................................................................................28
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Applications............................................................................................................................31
3.2 Safety concept.......................................................................................................................31
3.2.1 Safety components and functions..........................................................................................31
3.2.2 External safety components...................................................................................................32
3.2.3 Protection and monitoring functions of internal components.................................................32
3.2.4 Protection and monitoring functions for external components...............................................33
3.3 Design....................................................................................................................................33
3.3.1 Components...........................................................................................................................33
3.3.2 Design of the Basic Line Module............................................................................................34
3.3.3 Design of the Motor Module...................................................................................................35
3.3.4 Gating.....................................................................................................................................36
3.4 Operating principle.................................................................................................................36
3.5 Description of the components...............................................................................................37
3.5.1 SINAMICS Control Unit..........................................................................................................37
3.5.2 Terminal Modules...................................................................................................................37
3.5.3 Precharging............................................................................................................................37
3.5.4 Electromechanical door interlock system...............................................................................38
3.5.5 Make-proof grounding switch.................................................................................................38
3.5.6 Circuit-breaker (provided by the customer)............................................................................38
3.5.7 Converter transformer............................................................................................................39
3.5.8 Power Stack Adapter.............................................................................................................40
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 5
3.5.9 Actual value acquisition..........................................................................................................42
3.5.10 Common power supply..........................................................................................................42
3.5.10.1 Field of application.................................................................................................................42
3.5.10.2 Design....................................................................................................................................43
3.5.10.3 Connections...........................................................................................................................44
3.5.10.4 Interface description...............................................................................................................44
3.5.11 DM10 diagnostics module......................................................................................................45
3.5.11.1 Functions................................................................................................................................45
3.5.11.2 Measuring socket assignment................................................................................................47
3.5.11.3 Interface description of the connectors..................................................................................47
3.5.11.4 Signal processing...................................................................................................................51
3.5.11.5 Voltage monitoring.................................................................................................................52
3.5.12 Re-cooling unit ......................................................................................................................53
3.5.12.1 Re-cooling unit requirements.................................................................................................53
3.5.12.2 Operating principle of the re-cooling unit...............................................................................53
3.5.12.3 The internal deionized water circuit........................................................................................54
3.5.13 Customer terminal strips........................................................................................................54
3.6 Description of options.............................................................................................................55
3.6.1 NAMUR terminal strip (option B00)........................................................................................55
3.6.2 Auxiliary voltage supply 3 AC 200 V 50 Hz (option C30).......................................................55
3.6.3 Suitable for marine use with individual certificate from Lloyds Register (LR) (option E21)......56
3.6.4 Isolation amplifiers for optional analog inputs (option E86)....................................................56
3.6.5 Isolation amplifiers for optional analog outputs (option E87).................................................56
3.6.6 Can Bus interface (option G20)..............................................................................................57
3.6.7 Modbus RTU Slave interface (option G22)............................................................................57
3.6.8 1x temperature sensor evaluation unit TM150 (option G51)..................................................57
3.6.9 Additional Terminal Module TM31 (option G61)....................................................................57
3.6.10 Additional Terminal Module TM15 (option G63)....................................................................58
3.6.11 PADU8 diagnosis module (option G66).................................................................................58
3.6.12 Indicator lamps in the cabinet door (option K20)....................................................................59
3.6.13 Display instruments in the cabinet door for voltage, current, speed, and output plus
indicator lamps (option K21)..................................................................................................59
3.6.14 Sensor Module SMC30 (option K50).....................................................................................59
3.6.15 dv/dt filter (option L10)...........................................................................................................60
3.6.16 dv/dt filter (option L11)...........................................................................................................62
3.6.17 Automatic restart function (option L32)..................................................................................63
3.6.18 Line-side grounding switch (option L48)................................................................................64
3.6.19 Motor-side grounding switch (option L49)..............................................................................64
3.6.20 Cabinet illumination and service socket in closed-loop control unit (option L50)...................65
3.6.21 Disconnector at the drive output (option L51)........................................................................65
3.6.22 Circuit breaker at the drive output (option L52)......................................................................65
3.6.23 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (option L53)...................................................................65
3.6.24 Anti-condensation heating (option L55).................................................................................66
3.6.25 EMERGENCY STOP Category 1 (option L60)......................................................................66
3.6.26 Braking Module (option L72)..................................................................................................67
3.6.27 Safety locking system (option M10).......................................................................................67
3.6.28 Power cable connection at the drive input from above (option M13).....................................67
3.6.29 Signal and control cable (max. 2.5 mm²) (option M32)..........................................................68
3.6.30 IP54 degree of protection (option M54)..................................................................................68
3.6.31 Redundant fan in the power unit (option M61).......................................................................68
3.6.32 Suitability for marine use (option M66)...................................................................................68
3.6.33 Controlled outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment 400 V 3 AC (option N30).......................69
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
6Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.34 Sine-wave filter (option Y15)..................................................................................................69
4 Preparations for use...................................................................................................................................71
4.1 Requirements for installation location....................................................................................71
4.2 Inspections when receiving the delivery.................................................................................71
4.2.1 Checking the delivery.............................................................................................................71
4.2.2 Scope of delivery....................................................................................................................72
4.2.3 Checking shock and tilt indicators..........................................................................................72
4.2.4 Checking the load handling attachments...............................................................................73
4.3 Transportation........................................................................................................................74
4.3.1 Transport markings................................................................................................................74
4.3.2 Transport requirements..........................................................................................................74
4.3.3 Observe center of gravity.......................................................................................................75
4.3.4 Transport with a fork-lift truck.................................................................................................75
4.3.5 Transport with a crane...........................................................................................................76
4.3.6 Using lifting rods.....................................................................................................................76
4.3.7 Transporting transportation units packed in boxes................................................................78
4.4 Unpacking..............................................................................................................................79
4.4.1 Removing the packaging........................................................................................................79
4.4.2 Removing load securing devices...........................................................................................80
4.4.3 Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet...............................................................................80
4.4.4 Opening doors in preparation for use.....................................................................................81
4.4.4.1 Opening doors in preparation for use.....................................................................................81
4.4.5 Checking the shock and tilt indicators inside the cabinet.......................................................82
4.5 Storage...................................................................................................................................82
4.5.1 Emptying the drive.................................................................................................................82
4.5.2 Storing a device.....................................................................................................................83
5 Installation..................................................................................................................................................85
5.1 Safety instructions for assembly............................................................................................85
5.2 Tools required........................................................................................................................86
5.3 Attaching side panels.............................................................................................................86
5.4 Screwing the transport units together....................................................................................87
5.5 Connecting to the foundation.................................................................................................88
5.6 Connecting cabinets...............................................................................................................89
5.7 Connecting the DC bus..........................................................................................................90
5.8 Connecting the interface terminals.........................................................................................91
5.9 Connecting the water circuits.................................................................................................92
5.10 Installing the battery of the uninterruptible power supply.......................................................93
6 Electrical connection...................................................................................................................................95
6.1 Safety instructions for electrical connections.........................................................................95
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility.................................................................................................97
6.3 Potential concept..................................................................................................................100
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 7
6.4 Electrical requirements.........................................................................................................100
6.5 Connection...........................................................................................................................101
6.5.1 Manually unlocking power-unit doors...................................................................................101
6.5.2 Preparations for connecting the power cables.....................................................................101
6.5.3 Connecting power cables.....................................................................................................101
6.5.4 Connect the power cable to the motor and the supply system............................................102
6.5.5 Connecting ground...............................................................................................................104
6.5.6 Connect the auxiliary voltage...............................................................................................105
6.5.7 Connecting the encoder to the SMC30 Sensor Module.......................................................106
6.5.8 Interconnecting optional connections...................................................................................108
6.5.9 Connecting the re-cooling unit to the drive...........................................................................108
6.5.10 Fastening the cable ducts with cable ties.............................................................................108
7 Start-up ....................................................................................................................................................109
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface..................................................109
7.1.1 Hardware components required for PROFIBUS communication ........................................109
7.1.2 PROFIBUS interface, diagnostics LEDs, address switches.................................................110
7.1.3 Connecting PROFIBUS cables............................................................................................112
7.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS address switches............................................................................113
7.1.5 Requirements for communication via PROFIBUS...............................................................114
8 Operation..................................................................................................................................................115
8.1 Safety instructions for operation...........................................................................................115
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel.............................................................................116
8.2.1 General information about the AOP30 operator panel.........................................................116
8.2.1.1 AOP30 operator panel.........................................................................................................116
8.2.1.2 Buttons of the AOP30..........................................................................................................118
8.2.1.3 Basic operation of the AOP 30.............................................................................................118
8.2.2 Configuration of the AOP30 operator panel.........................................................................121
8.2.2.1 Define operation screen.......................................................................................................121
8.2.2.2 Control settings....................................................................................................................125
8.2.2.3 Inhibit functions....................................................................................................................128
8.2.3 Menu description and setting options...................................................................................131
8.2.3.1 Operation screen..................................................................................................................131
8.2.3.2 Parameterization..................................................................................................................133
8.2.3.3 Fault/alarm memory.............................................................................................................136
8.2.3.4 Commissioning / service device commissioning..................................................................138
8.2.3.5 Commissioning / service drive commissioning.....................................................................142
8.2.3.6 Commissioning / Service - AOP settings.............................................................................143
8.2.3.7 Commissioning / Service - AOP diagnostics........................................................................147
8.2.3.8 Language.............................................................................................................................151
8.3 Parameter............................................................................................................................151
8.3.1 Parameters...........................................................................................................................151
8.3.2 Parameter types...................................................................................................................152
8.4 Functions..............................................................................................................................153
8.4.1 Setpoint channel and closed-loop control............................................................................153
8.4.1.1 Setpoint channel..................................................................................................................153
8.4.1.2 Vector control.......................................................................................................................156
8.4.1.3 U/f control.............................................................................................................................159
8.4.2 Analog and digital inputs/outputs.........................................................................................160
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
8Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.4.2.1 Analog outputs.....................................................................................................................160
8.4.2.2 Digital outputs......................................................................................................................163
8.4.2.3 Digital inputs/outputs............................................................................................................164
8.4.2.4 Additional settings for analog outputs..................................................................................165
8.4.2.5 Scaling the input signal of the analog inputs........................................................................168
8.4.3 Monitoring functions and protective functions......................................................................169
8.4.3.1 Insulation monitoring............................................................................................................169
8.4.3.2 Tripping of the circuit-breaker in case of undervoltage........................................................170
8.4.3.3 DC-link short-circuiter...........................................................................................................170
8.4.3.4 Vdc-max closed-loop control................................................................................................171
8.4.3.5 Speed monitoring with incremental encoder........................................................................173
8.4.3.6 Controlled stop, EMERGENCY STOP category 1...............................................................173
8.5 Fault and system messages................................................................................................174
8.5.1 External alarms and faults....................................................................................................174
8.5.2 Message from the grounding switch....................................................................................174
8.5.3 Diagnosis.............................................................................................................................175
8.5.3.1 Indicating and rectifying faults..............................................................................................175
8.5.3.2 Diagnostics via LEDs...........................................................................................................176
8.5.3.3 Diagnostics via parameters..................................................................................................177
9 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................183
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance.....................................................................................183
9.1.1 High snubber circuit capacitor voltages...............................................................................183
9.2 Grounding the system..........................................................................................................186
9.2.1 Grounding with a grounding device......................................................................................186
9.2.2 Grounding using a make-proof grounding switch.................................................................188
9.3 Opening the doors................................................................................................................189
9.3.1 Opening the power unit doors for maintenance work...........................................................189
9.3.2 Manually unlocking power unit doors...................................................................................190
9.3.3 Secure locking system (option M10)....................................................................................191
9.4 Preventive maintenance.......................................................................................................192
9.4.1 Inspection.............................................................................................................................192
9.4.2 Checklist for preventive maintenance work..........................................................................192
9.4.3 Visual inspections................................................................................................................193
9.4.3.1 Equipment for visual inspections..........................................................................................193
9.4.3.2 Checking the isolating clearances........................................................................................194
9.4.3.3 Checking hoisting solenoids and security bolts....................................................................194
9.4.3.4 Checking the plug connections............................................................................................194
9.4.3.5 Checking the cable and screw terminals..............................................................................194
9.5 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................194
9.5.1 Fan maintenance.................................................................................................................194
9.5.2 Filter mats............................................................................................................................195
9.5.2.1 Replacing filter mats.............................................................................................................195
9.5.2.2 Replacing the filter mats in the roof assembly.....................................................................196
9.5.3 Replacing the back-up battery of the AOP30 operator panel ..............................................197
9.5.4 Load operator panel firmware, parameter and signal descriptions......................................198
9.6 Cleaning...............................................................................................................................199
9.6.1 Removing dust deposits.......................................................................................................199
9.6.2 Cleaning aluminum parts.....................................................................................................200
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 9
9.7 Repairs.................................................................................................................................200
9.7.1 Torques................................................................................................................................201
9.7.2 Attaching the changing device to the stacker.......................................................................203
9.7.3 Replacing the phase module................................................................................................204
9.7.4 Replacing the diode module.................................................................................................211
9.7.5 Replacing the operator panel...............................................................................................215
9.7.6 Replacing the CompactFlash card.......................................................................................216
9.7.7 Replacing the precharging transformer................................................................................216
9.7.8 Replacing the precharging rectifier......................................................................................218
9.7.9 Replacing the AVT combination module..............................................................................219
9.7.10 Replacing fuses....................................................................................................................219
9.7.11 Replace the sponge for the leak detector............................................................................220
9.7.12 Replacing the Power Stack Adapter....................................................................................221
10 Spare parts...............................................................................................................................................225
11 Disposal....................................................................................................................................................227
11.1 Disposing of packaging material..........................................................................................227
11.2 Removing device components and old devices...................................................................227
A Service & Support.....................................................................................................................................229
B Technical data and drawings....................................................................................................................231
B.1 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................231
B.1.1 Notes about technical specifications....................................................................................231
B.1.2 Standards and regulations...................................................................................................231
B.1.3 Series connection variant of Basic Line Modules (option N15)............................................232
B.1.4 Connection variant: Performance enhancement through parallel operation of three drive
units......................................................................................................................................232
B.1.5 General technical specifications of the drive........................................................................233
B.1.6 Technical specifications of the common power supply........................................................235
B.1.7 Technical specifications of the diagnostics module DM10...................................................235
B.2 Terminal assignments..........................................................................................................236
B.2.1 Control pulpit interface (Terminal Modules TM31 and TM15)..............................................236
B.2.2 Terminal assignment of the NAMUR terminal strip (option B00).........................................237
B.2.3 Circuit-breaker interface.......................................................................................................238
B.2.4 Interfaces of the Power Stack Adapter.................................................................................239
B.2.4.1 Gating of the power semiconductors....................................................................................239
B.2.4.2 Selecting Safe Torque Off....................................................................................................239
B.2.4.3 Actual value channels..........................................................................................................240
B.2.4.4 Trip line................................................................................................................................240
B.2.4.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface..........................................................................................................240
B.2.4.6 Analog and digital outputs....................................................................................................241
B.2.4.7 Switch for the analog inputs.................................................................................................241
B.2.4.8 Analog and digital inputs and temperature sensor connections...........................................242
B.2.4.9 Electronics power supply.....................................................................................................243
C Checklists and forms................................................................................................................................245
C.1 Mechanical installation: Checklist........................................................................................245
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation........................................................................................246
Index.........................................................................................................................................................251
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
10 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Tables
Table 3-1 Connector -X231.........................................................................................................................48
Table 3-2 Connector -X232.........................................................................................................................49
Table 3-3 Connectors -X1 and -X31............................................................................................................49
Table 3-4 Connector -X32...........................................................................................................................50
Table 3-5 Connector -X33...........................................................................................................................50
Table 3-6 Connector -X34...........................................................................................................................50
Table 3-7 Connector -X35...........................................................................................................................50
Table 3-8 Connector -X36...........................................................................................................................51
Table 3-9 Deionized water requirements.....................................................................................................54
Table 3-10 Braking power of the Braking Module with external braking resistor...........................................67
Table 3-11 Max. permissible cable lengths...................................................................................................69
Table 6-1 Dimensioning cables.................................................................................................................100
Table 6-2 Cable cross-sections.................................................................................................................101
Table 6-3 Drive and motor connection terminals.......................................................................................103
Table 7-1 PROFIBUS interface X126........................................................................................................110
Table 7-2 Description of the DP1 LEDs.....................................................................................................111
Table 8-1 List of signals for the operation screen......................................................................................124
Table 8-2 Scaling.......................................................................................................................................125
Table 8-3 Overview of important parameters (equipment commissioning)...............................................140
Table 8-4 Drive Object VectorMV..............................................................................................................142
Table 8-5 Parameter..................................................................................................................................154
Table 8-6 Parameter..................................................................................................................................154
Table 8-7 Parameter..................................................................................................................................155
Table 8-8 Parameter..................................................................................................................................156
Table 8-9 LEDs of the Power Stack Adapters ..........................................................................................176
Table 8-10 LEDs of the DM10 diagnostics module.....................................................................................177
Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the backup battery..........................................................................197
Table 9-2 Tightening torque for screws.....................................................................................................201
Table 9-3 Tightening torques for screw terminals for copper cables without cable lug 1)..........................202
Table B-1 Standards and conformity.........................................................................................................231
Table B-2 General technical specifications................................................................................................233
Table B-3 Cooling......................................................................................................................................234
Table B-4 Climatic environmental conditions.............................................................................................234
Table B-5 Mechanical ambient conditions.................................................................................................234
Table B-6 Other ambient conditions..........................................................................................................235
Table B-7 Technical specifications of the common power supply.............................................................235
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 11
Table B-8 Technical specifications of the AD586LR reference element....................................................235
Table B-9 Terminal assignment of customer interface TM15....................................................................236
Table B-10 Terminal assignment of customer interface TM31....................................................................236
Table B-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR terminal strip.........................................................................237
Table B-12 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X11......................................................238
Table B-13 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with OFF and undervoltage coil....238
Table B-14 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with two OFF coils and
undervoltage coil.......................................................................................................................238
Table B-15 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with capacitor release..................238
Table B-16 Power Stack Adapter 2: Actual value channels.........................................................................240
Table B-17 Power Stack Adapter 2: Trip line...............................................................................................240
Table B-18 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...............................................................................................................240
Table B-19 Power Stack Adapter 2: Analog and digital outputs..................................................................241
Table B-20 Power Stack Adapter 2: Switch for the analog inputs...............................................................241
Table B-21 Power Stack Adapter 2: Analog and digital inputs and temperature sensor connections.........242
Table B-22 Power Stack Adapter 2: Electronics power supply....................................................................243
Figures
Figure 3-1 Design of the power unit..............................................................................................................34
Figure 3-2 Basic Line Module with diodes in 12-pulse configuration............................................................35
Figure 3-3 Phase module.............................................................................................................................36
Figure 3-4 Overview of PSA interfaces.........................................................................................................41
Figure 3-5 AVT combination module............................................................................................................42
Figure 3-6 Design when using IGCTs...........................................................................................................43
Figure 3-7 Overview ....................................................................................................................................44
Figure 3-8 Logical design of the DM10 diagnosis module............................................................................46
Figure 3-9 Printed circuit board of the diagnostics module...........................................................................47
Figure 3-10 Circuit diagram option L10..........................................................................................................60
Figure 3-11 Connecting the motor to the dv/dt filter.......................................................................................61
Figure 3-12 Circuit diagram option L11..........................................................................................................62
Figure 3-13 Connecting the motor to the sine-wave filter...............................................................................70
Figure 4-1 Example of attaching and displaying the shock and tilt indicators..............................................73
Figure 4-2 Example illustration of centers of gravity.....................................................................................75
Figure 4-3 Lifting bar label............................................................................................................................77
Figure 4-4 Securing the lifting rods...............................................................................................................78
Figure 4-5 Transporting a transportation unit (still in packaging) with a crane.............................................79
Figure 4-6 Example: Label with instructions for opening the doors..............................................................81
Figure 4-7 Example: Cover screw for manual door interlocking...................................................................81
Figure 5-1 Connecting two transportation units............................................................................................87
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
12 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Figure 5-2 Connecting four transportation units...........................................................................................87
Figure 5-3 Connecting cabinets....................................................................................................................89
Figure 5-4 DC-bus connection......................................................................................................................91
Figure 5-5 Example: Connecting interface terminals ...................................................................................92
Figure 5-6 Remove the screws.....................................................................................................................93
Figure 5-7 Install battery...............................................................................................................................94
Figure 6-1 Shield connection using a clip.....................................................................................................99
Figure 6-2 Bridging shield gaps....................................................................................................................99
Figure 6-3 Potential concept.......................................................................................................................100
Figure 6-4 Example: Connecting the power cables....................................................................................102
Figure 6-5 Connection of the supply-system power cable..........................................................................103
Figure 6-6 Grounding lug............................................................................................................................104
Figure 6-7 Connection for auxiliary voltages..............................................................................................105
Figure 6-8 Connecting the external encoder to the SMC30 Sensor Module..............................................107
Figure 6-9 Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal........................................107
Figure 6-10 Schematic diagram: Fastening the cable ties............................................................................108
Figure 7-1 PROFIBUS interface.................................................................................................................110
Figure 7-2 X126 PROFIBUS connection....................................................................................................110
Figure 7-3 PROFIBUS address switch cover.............................................................................................111
Figure 7-4 PROFIBUS connectors.............................................................................................................112
Figure 7-5 Position of the bus terminating resistors...................................................................................112
Figure 8-1 AOP30 operator panel...............................................................................................................117
Figure 8-2 Menu structure of the AOP 30...................................................................................................119
Figure 8-3 Function keys of the AOP 30.....................................................................................................120
Figure 8-4 Example of the operation screen...............................................................................................121
Figure 8-5 Menu structure of the operation screens...................................................................................131
Figure 8-6 Parameterization menu structure..............................................................................................133
Figure 8-7 Selecting data sets....................................................................................................................135
Figure 8-8 Menu structure for fault memory/alarm memory.......................................................................136
Figure 8-9 Alarm screen.............................................................................................................................138
Figure 8-10 Commissioning / service / device commissioning menu structure............................................138
Figure 8-11 Commissioning / service / drive commissioning menu structure...............................................142
Figure 8-12 Commissioning /Service / AOP settings menu structure...........................................................143
Figure 8-13 Commissioning / Service / AOP diagnostics menu structure....................................................147
Figure 8-14 Language menu structure.........................................................................................................151
Figure 8-15 Parameter types........................................................................................................................152
Figure 8-16 Switchover conditions................................................................................................................158
Figure 8-17 Operating areas and characteristic curves for the induction motor with drive supply...............159
Figure 8-18 Example: Setting analog output 0.............................................................................................162
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 13
Figure 8-19 Potential supply of external signals...........................................................................................164
Figure 8-20 Digital signal output to the system I/O.......................................................................................165
Figure 9-1 Grounding points.......................................................................................................................187
Figure 9-2 Example: Attaching the grounding spider..................................................................................188
Figure 9-3 Make-proof-grounding switch closed.........................................................................................189
Figure 9-4 Principle of the mechanical door interlock.................................................................................191
Figure 9-5 Components of the secure locking system................................................................................191
Figure 9-6 Schematic diagram: Replacing filter mats.................................................................................195
Figure 9-7 Changing the filter in the roof assembly....................................................................................196
Figure 9-8 Replacing the backup battery....................................................................................................197
Figure 9-9 Attaching the changing device to the forklift truck.....................................................................203
Figure 9-10 Attaching the changing device to the forklift truck.....................................................................204
Figure 9-11 Lifting solenoid..........................................................................................................................205
Figure 9-12 Water connection......................................................................................................................205
Figure 9-13 Fiber-optic conductors and power supply cable........................................................................206
Figure 9-14 Busbar package........................................................................................................................206
Figure 9-15 Motor current acquisition module..............................................................................................206
Figure 9-16 Busbar.......................................................................................................................................207
Figure 9-17 Installing the busbars................................................................................................................207
Figure 9-18 Insulators of the phase module and lifting lugs.........................................................................208
Figure 9-19 Changing device: roller tracks...................................................................................................208
Figure 9-20 Changing device: joining the roller tracks..................................................................................209
Figure 9-21 Changing device: stop brackets................................................................................................209
Figure 9-22 Phase module (placed down)....................................................................................................210
Figure 9-23 Diode module: water connection...............................................................................................212
Figure 9-24 Diode module: phase connections............................................................................................212
Figure 9-25 Diode module: insulators...........................................................................................................213
Figure 9-26 Diode module: lugs....................................................................................................................213
Figure 9-27 Changing device: roller tracks...................................................................................................213
Figure 9-28 Changing device: joining the roller tracks..................................................................................214
Figure 9-29 Changing device: stop brackets................................................................................................214
Figure 9-30 Replacing the operator panel....................................................................................................215
Figure 9-31 Replacing the precharging transformer.....................................................................................217
Figure 9-32 Replacing the precharging rectifier............................................................................................218
Figure 9-33 Example of an AVT combination module..................................................................................219
Figure 9-34 Sponge......................................................................................................................................220
Figure 9-35 Replacing the sponge................................................................................................................221
Figure B-1 24-pulse supply with series connection of two Basic Line Modules..........................................232
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
14 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Figure B-2 Performance enhancement with parallel operation of three complete drive units 1); 36-pulse
supply possible..........................................................................................................................232
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 15
Table of contents
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
16 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Introduction 1
1.1 About these instructions
These instructions describe the drive and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to final
disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use.
Read these instructions before you handle the drive and follow the instructions. The
instructions contain information about the safe handling of the drive as well as its components
and modules. They provide information on assembling, installing, and maintaining the
equipment properly.
If you have suggestions for improving the document, please contact our Service Center
(Page 229).
Text format features
The warning notice system is explained on the rear of the inside front. Always follow the safety
instructions and notices in these instructions.
In addition to the safety-related warning notices which you must read, you will find the text in
these instructions is formatted in the following way:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps
in the order given.
● Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
– Lists on the second level are hyphenated.
Note
A Note is an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or the
relevant section of the document. Notes provide you with help or further suggestions/ideas.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 17
Introduction
1.1 About these instructions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
18 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Safety instructions 2
In the individual chapters of this document, you will find safety instructions that must be obeyed
absolutely, for your own safety, to protect other people and to avoid damage to property. Pay
attention to the following safety instructions for all activities on the inverter.
2.1 Warning symbol on the device
Please observe the warning symbols attached to the device. The warning symbols have the
following meaning:
Warning symbol Meaning
Warning: Voltage
Warning: Hot surface
General warning symbol: Observe the explanations about the hazard on the
device labels.
For transportation, observe the "transportation markings (Page 74)" on the device packaging.
2.2 Qualified personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may only be operated by personnel
qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific
task, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Because of their training and
experience, qualified personnel can recognize any risks involved with handling these products/
systems and avoid any possible dangers.
2.3 The five safety rules
For your own personal safety and to prevent material damage when carrying out any work,
always observe the safety-relevant instructions and the following five safety rules according
to EN 50110‑1 "Working in a voltage-free state". Apply the five safety rules in the sequence
stated before starting work.
Five safety rules
1. Disconnect the system.
Also disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example, anti-condensation heating.
2. Secure against reconnection.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 19
3. Verify absence of operating voltage.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
2.4 Safe handling
WARNING
High voltages from external supplies
Even if the circuit breaker is open, parts of the drive can be under voltage (live) as a result of
the auxiliary voltage at the premagnetization, precharging or demagnetization transformers.
This danger is not limited to the drive, but can also occur with components that are electrically
connected to the drive (e.g. circuit breakers or isolators). Touching live parts can result in
death, serious injury, and damage to property.
● Isolate all components that can feed voltage to the converter before commencing work.
WARNING
High voltages during operation
When operating this equipment very high voltages develop. Even after switching off the mains
voltage, or while the connected machine is still turning, high voltages can remain for a
prolonged length of time. High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules
are not observed or if the equipment is handled incorrectly.
● Operate the drive properly.
● Always follow the "The five safety rules (Page 19)" when performing any work.
● Only remove the covers using the methods described by these operating instructions.
● Maintain the drive regularly and correctly.
WARNING
High voltages from machines still turning and connected
Rotating machinery can induce dangerous high voltages and synchronous motors that are
not de-excited immediately can also pose a hazard. If the connection to the motor is not
isolated or grounded, these voltages can also remain. Touching live parts can result in death
or serious injury.
● Before opening the doors, wait until the connected machine has come to a standstill.
Safety instructions
2.4 Safe handling
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
20 Operating Instructions 04/2017
WARNING
High voltages from DC link capacitors
High voltages are still present at the DC link capacitors even after shutdown. Touching live
parts can result in death or serious injury.
● A label on the converter specifies the discharge times of the DC link capacitors. Only open
the converter once these discharge times have expired.
● Observe the five safety rules when performing any work.
WARNING
High auxiliary voltages
High auxiliary voltages are still present even after shutdown. Touching live parts can result
in death or serious injury.
● Observe the five safety rules when performing any work.
WARNING
Hazardous arcing
Hazards caused by arcing can occur as result of the following factors, for example:
● The input currents are exceeded
● Incorrectly dimensioned circuit breaker or transformers
● Incorrectly connected cables or cables that have not been connected
● Excessive pollution
Arcing can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Make sure that the system is properly dimensioned and that the power cables are correctly
connected. The maximum permissible input currents are listed in the "Technical
specifications".
● Remove any excessive pollution.
WARNING
Live, moving or rotating parts
Contact with the parts mentioned can result in death, serious physical injury or damage to
property.
● Observe the instructions regarding installation and operation.
● Always take protective measures before touching any components.
● Do not remove any necessary covers.
Safety instructions
2.4 Safe handling
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 21
WARNING
Hot component surfaces
Certain components (e.g. heat sinks and reactors) can become very hot during operation.
These components can remain hot for a long time after operation. Contact can result in serious
injury, such as skin burns.
● Do not touch hot components even after you have switched off the drive.
WARNING
Hot anti-condensation heating surface
When the temperature control limit value is reached the anti-condensation heating is switched
on. Once activated, the anti-condensation heating can generate a great deal of heat. Contact
can result in serious injury, such as skin burns.
● Ensure that the anti-condensation heating cannot be touched.
● Ensure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before carrying out any repair
or maintenance work.
CAUTION
Places that are difficult to access
If you do not use appropriate protective equipment when working in places that are difficult
to access you are at risk of injury. For example, sharp edges and splinters can cause injuries
to the head and skin. If you use unsuitable steps when working on the upper areas of the
drive, you can fall and injure yourself.
● Use appropriate protective equipment, especially a hard hat and gloves.
● In the upper areas of the drive, use suitable steps.
CAUTION
Deionized water
Deionized water is harmful to eyes and skin and can damage surfaces.
● Therefore, use appropriate protective clothing for all work on the drive. However, if your
eyes or skin do come into contact with deionized water, rinse the affected area thoroughly
with tap water as soon as possible.
● If deionized water leaks out, eliminate the source of the problem and remove the liquid
from the surfaces affected.
Safety instructions
2.4 Safe handling
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
22 Operating Instructions 04/2017
NOTICE
Unsuitable residual current monitoring device
If you operate the drive together with a residual current monitoring device (RCD), it is possible
the residual current monitoring device will trip in error (nuisance trip). The drive may be
switched off as a result of the protection device tripping in error.
● To minimize the risk of faulty trips, use a type-B RCD.
2.5 Electromagnetic fields in electrical power engineering installations
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of electrical power engineering
installations. Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, These devices can
malfunction if electromagnetic fields are present.
WARNING
Interference with pacemakers
The functioning of cardiac pacemakers could be impaired by electromagnetic fields. Death
or serious physical injury can result.
● It is therefore not permissible for people with pacemakers to stand close to the converter.
NOTICE
Data loss
Electromagnetic fields can cause data loss to magnetic or electronic data storage media.
● Therefore, do not carry magnetic or electronic data storage media with you.
Nominated persons in control of electrical installations can find further information on
electromagnetic fields under "Information for persons responsible for plants and systems."
Safety instructions
2.5 Electromagnetic fields in electrical power engineering installations
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 23
2.6 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
ESD guidelines
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic components can be destroyed in the event of improper handling, transport, storage,
and shipping.
Pack the electronic components in appropriate ESD packaging; e.g. ESD foam, ESD
packaging bags and ESD transport containers.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
● Avoid physical contact with electronic components. If it is essential that you perform work
on these components, you must wear one of the following pieces of protective gear:
– Grounded ESD wrist strap
– ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips if there is also an ESD floor.
● Do not place electronic components close to data terminals, monitors or televisions.
Maintain a minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm).
● Electronic components should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating
materials such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of
synthetic fibers.
● Bring components into contact only with ESD-compliant materials, e.g. ESD tables, ESD
surfaces, ESD packaging.
● Only carry out measurements on the components if one of the following conditions is met:
– The measuring device is grounded with a protective conductor, for example.
– The measuring head of a floating measuring device has been discharged directly before
the measurement.
The necessary ESD protective measures for the entire working range for electrostatically
sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings.
Precise instructions for ESD protective measures are specified in the standard
DIN EN 61340‑5‑1.
Safety instructions
2.6 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
24 Operating Instructions 04/2017
①Sitting a Conductive floor cover‐
ing 1)
d ESD clothing
②Standing b ESD furniture e ESD wrist strap
③Standing/sitting c Wearing of ESD shoes or
ESD shoe grounding
strips 2)
f Cabinet ground connection
1) Only effective in conjunction with ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips
2) Only effective in conjunction with conductive floor covering
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical
installation
2.7.1 Proper usage
The converters are intended to be used as a stationary installation in closed and dry rooms
with a clean atmosphere. You can find the ambient and operating temperatures to be adhered
to in the technical data. If the described environmental conditions are not observed, warranty
claims and other claims may be rejected.
WARNING
Explosions
If you operate the converter in a potentially explosive atmosphere, explosions can occur which
can cause death, serious injuries or material damage.
● Only operate the converter in a non-explosive environment (no hazardous zones).
WARNING
Non-observance of proper usage
Improper use of the devices described can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
● Please observe all instructions for proper use.
Safety instructions
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 25
The nominated person in control of an electrical installation must ensure that the following
points are observed:
● Follow the local and industry-specific safety and setup regulations. Observe the
requirements in the guidelines specified in the "Standards and regulations" section of the
"Technical data and drawings." Ensure that the specific safety and construction regulations
and the regulations for using personal protective equipment are observed during all work.
● The operating instructions and the complete product documentation are always available
when carrying out any work.
● The technical data as well as the specifications relating to the permissible installation,
connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken into account at all times.
● Only qualified personnel or personnel supervised by responsible, skilled specialists are
allowed to carry out basic planning and all work on the converter.
● During shipping, specific transport conditions are adhered to.
● Assembly is performed according to assembly instructions. Separate cabinet units are
connected properly (cables and busbars).
● All instructions for EMC-compatible installation, cabling, shielding, grounding, and for
adequate auxiliary power supply are to be observed.
● Commissioning is only to be performed by qualified personnel trained for that purpose in
accordance with the commissioning instructions.
● System configuration is carried out by an experienced system integrator. Further system
components such as the circuit-breaker, transformer, cables, and motor are adjusted for
converter operation.
● The converter is only operated in conjunction with the engineered components.
● Different operating modes, overloads, load cycles, and differing environmental conditions
are permitted only after special arrangement with the manufacturer.
Note
Make use of the support and services offered by the relevant service center for planning,
installation, commissioning, and servicing work. You can find the relevant contact person under
"Service & Support".
2.7.2 Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Safety instructions
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
26 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. You can find more information about industrial security by visiting:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
2.7.3 Grounding concept
Create a grounding concept and integrate the converter within it. The grounding concept must
take into consideration national provisions and system specifics. Ensure that the following
criteria are fulfilled:
● Screw together the converter sub-units at the installation site, ensuring good conductivity.
● If shield busbars are provided, these must be connected together.
● When the converter is supplied with power, the protective ground conductor must be
connected to the system's grounding point. Select the cross-section of the protective ground
conductor from one of the following variants:
– According to local wiring regulations
– Calculated according to IEC 60364-5-54, 543.1
– Half a phase conductor cross-section
2.7.4 Installation site safety
WARNING
Unsafe installation sites
This drive is used in industrial high-voltage installations. Improper use, incorrect operation,
insufficient maintenance, and access by unauthorized persons can lead to accidents. The
results can be death, serious bodily injury or damage to property.
● Install the drive in electrical rooms where only qualified personnel have access. If this is
not possible, then ensure that a barrier prevents uncontrolled access. Use safety fences
and appropriate signs, for example, to prevent unauthorized entry to the zone that has
been fenced off.
● Put up notices which indicate that only trained personnel are allowed to operate the drive
and carry out maintenance and repair work.
Safety instructions
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 27
Note
Installations that include converters must be equipped with additional monitoring and protective
devices to fulfill safety requirements. Follow technical equipment legislation and accident
prevention regulations.
Note
The converter will be supplied on request without an electromechanical door interlocking
system if space is restricted. In this instance, the customer must provide an access interlock
system compliant with IEC 61800-5 /-1.
Note
The drive does not have a grounding breaker at the input/output. The system operator must,
therefore, ensure that there is sufficient grounding.
2.7.5 Measures for operator protection in electromagnetic fields
The plant operator is responsible for taking the following appropriate measures (labels and
hazard warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel against any possible risk.
● Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations or the applicable
national regulations in the country of installation. In Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are
subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11 stipulated by the German statutory industrial
accident insurance institution.
● Display adequate hazard warning notices on the installation.
● Place barriers around hazardous areas.
● Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source.
● Make sure that personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear.
2.8 Residual risks
According to the EU machinery directive, machine manufacturers / plant operators must
conduct a risk assessment of their machine. Plant operators must conduct a risk assessment
of their plant. In particular, pay attention to Annex 1 "General Principles" of the EU machinery
directive.
Safety instructions
2.8 Residual risks
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
28 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Pay attention to the following residual risks:
● Unintentional movements of driven machine parts
Unintentional movements of driven machine parts can occur during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repair, e.g. from the following causes:
– Hardware defects and/or software errors in the sensors, controllers, actuators, and
connection technology
– Response times of the controller and drive
– Operating and/or environmental conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of radio devices/cell phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller
– External influences/damage
● High temperatures and emissions
A fault can occur as a result of the following, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Software errors
– Operating and/or environmental conditions outside of the specification
– External influences/damage
A fault can, for example, have the following consequences both inside and outside the drive:
– Extraordinarily high temperatures, including open fires as a result of the fault
– Emissions of light, noise, particles or gases
Converters with open type/IP20 protection must be installed in a distribution station or
comparable environment.
● Hazardous shock voltages
Hazardous shock voltages can result from the following causes, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operating and/or environmental conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– External influences/damage
● The release of substances and emissions that are harmful to the environment
Improper operation or the improper disposal of components can harm the environment.
Safety instructions
2.8 Residual risks
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 29
● Damage from pressure build-up during electric arcs in the event of a fault
If the dimensions of the building have not been designed correctly for the drive, damage
can result from the pressure that may build up inside.
● Dangerous electric arcs during internal faults
The drives are designed according to the relevant IEC standards and have been tested in
line with strict type-testing procedures. They were developed and manufactured so that
there is a very low probability of internal faults occurring. However, internal faults cannot
be completely ruled out.
WARNING
Dangerous electric arcs during internal faults
Defects such as damage to components, overvoltages, or loose parts, as well as exceptional
operating statuses, can cause a failure within the enclosure. This can result in an internal
electric arc. If an electric arc occurs and people are nearby, this could lead to death, serious
physical injury, and damage to property.
● Ensure that only qualified personnel perform work on the drive.
● Observe the safety and operating instructions in this documentation and on labels at the
drive for all work on the drive.
Note
There are no standards for medium-voltage drives stipulating requirements or inspections for
electric arc resistance. There is therefore neither formal guidance provided nor formal
certification available with regard to electric arc resistance.
Safety instructions
2.8 Residual risks
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
30 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Description 3
3.1 Applications
The drive is a medium-voltage drive for phase-rotation-controlled machines. The drive is a
single drive designed for applications with a quadratic, constant load characteristic and no
regenerative feedback. Typical applications include pumps, fans, compressors, extruders,
mixers, and mills.
Note
For the output range of the drive, see "Technical specifications".
See also
Technical data and drawings (Page 231)
3.2 Safety concept
The converter and its components are subject to a comprehensive safety concept. When used
properly, the security concept guarantees safe installation, safe operation as well as safe
service and maintenance.
The safety concept encompasses safety components and functions to protect the device and
operators. The converter is also equipped with monitoring functions to protect external
components.
The converter operates safely when the interlock and protection systems are functioning
properly. Nevertheless, there are areas on the converter that are hazardous for personnel and
that cause material damage if the safety information of all the instructions and the labels on
the converter are not strictly observed.
3.2.1 Safety components and functions
The drive has the following safety components and functions to protect personnel:
● The make-proof grounding switch for grounding the voltage DC link.
● The electromechanical door interlock system prevents access to the power unit while the
drive is in operation. The doors cannot be opened until the grounding switch has been
closed. The door for the control section, however, can be opened for monitoring purposes
even during operation.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 31
● The electromechanical interlock system for the make-proof grounding switch prevents the
make-proof grounding switch from closing for the voltage DC link. The make-proof
grounding switch can only be closed if the circuit-breaker is open and the DC link has been
completely discharged.
● The EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton in the cabinet door is a pushbutton with
mechanical interlock system for EMERGENCY OFF, Stop Category 0 (standard).
Note
As option, the make-proof grounding switch also serves to ground the input side (option L48)
and the output side (option L49).
3.2.2 External safety components
The drive has the following external safety components for the safety concept:
● Circuit breaker
More detailed information is provided in Chapter Circuit-breaker (provided by the
customer) (Page 38).
● Input-side transformer
The transformer on the input side must be configured in such a way that the maximum short-
circuit current is not exceeded. Information on this is provided in the technical data sheet
of the transformer.
3.2.3 Protection and monitoring functions of internal components
The internal components of the drive have the following protection and monitoring functions:
● Crowbar
● Drive protection based on monitoring systems:
– Current monitoring
– DC-link monitoring
– Output voltage monitoring
– Thermal monitoring of the power unit
– Precharge monitoring
– Insulation monitoring
– Supply voltage monitoring
– GSV monitoring
– Circuit-breaker monitoring
– Re-cooling unit monitoring
Description
3.2 Safety concept
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
32 Operating Instructions 04/2017
● Shutdown in the event of semiconductor failure
● Shutdown in the event of control component failure
● Internal protection functions for the control hardware
● Protection against communication failure between the closed-loop control and the power
unit
● Anti-condensation heating
3.2.4 Protection and monitoring functions for external components
Transformer and motor can be monitored in the drive. A fast protective shutdown that you can
activate for external problems, e.g. short-circuits, is present.
3.3 Design
3.3.1 Components
The drive in the basic configuration is equipped with the following components:
● 12-pulse Basic Line Module
● DC link
● Motor Module
An optional 24-pulse Basic Line Module is also available for other configurations.
Description
3.3 Design
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 33
The drive is a three-level voltage DC-link drive.
N9a+] aa
1 Circuit-breaker 5 Motor Module (3-level inverter) with IGCT
2 Drive transformer 6 Motor-side voltage/current transformers
3 Basic Line Module
(diode rectifier)
7 High-voltage motor
4 DC link with dry-type capacitors
Figure 3-1 Design of the power unit
3.3.2 Design of the Basic Line Module
In a 12-pulse configuration, the Basic Line Module consists of a rectifier module. In a 24-pulse
configuration, the Basic Line Module comprises two rectifier modules.
Description
3.3 Design
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
34 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Motor Module and Braking Module units can be connected to the Basic Line Module via the
DC bus.
Figure 3-2 Basic Line Module with diodes in 12-pulse configuration
A rectifier module consists of two B6 diode bridges connected in parallel. 12 disk-type thyristors
installed in the module are arranged in a clamped stack. Each diode is equipped with an RC
circuit.
3.3.3 Design of the Motor Module
The Motor Module comprises three identical phase modules.
On each phase module, four IGCT power semiconductors are located between water-cooled
heat sinks to ensure adequate cooling on both sides of the components. In addition, four
freewheeling diodes, two neutral-point diodes and two clamp circuits are installed in each
phase module. The clamp circuits comprise the following components:
● Switch-on relief choke
● Snubber capacitor
● Snubber diode
● Snubber resistor
The switch-on relief chokes are located on the side of the phase module. The snubber
capacitors and resistors are located in the lower area of the phase module.
Description
3.3 Design
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 35
①Block diagram of phase module
②Phase module
Figure 3-3 Phase module
The DC-link capacitor bank is connected to the individual phase modules through a low-
inductance flat busbar. The low-inductance flat busbar is constructed as busbar package. The
individual busbars and insulation layers are glued or screwed together.
3.3.4 Gating
The gating group and the GCT (Gate-Commutated Thyristor) power semiconductor together
form a fixed unit, the IGCT (Integrated Gate-Commutated Thyristor).
The power semiconductors are connected via the gating boards. The gating command is
transmitted from the power stack adapter (PSA) to the gating board via a plastic fiber-optic
cable connection.
3.4 Operating principle
A constant DC-link voltage for the Motor Module is generated from the line voltage. The Motor
Module provides the power for the connected motor via the DC-link voltage.
Description
3.4 Operating principle
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
36 Operating Instructions 04/2017
The DC link capacitors smooth the voltage and stop the energy in the DC link. The DC link
capacitors are maintenance free and self-healing. The drive is switched off when the circuit-
breaker is disconnected. The DC link is discharged by means of balancing resistors.
3.5 Description of the components
3.5.1 SINAMICS Control Unit
The CU320-2 DP Control Unit is the central control module of the drive's open-loop and closed-
loop control system. The connections are wired internally to the customer terminal block.
Further information is available in the following documents:
● You will find information on the wiring in the circuit manual in the "Technical specifications
and drawings" appendix.
● You can find information on the interfaces and LEDs in the "Supplementary component
descriptions" document.
See also
Technical data and drawings (Page 231)
3.5.2 Terminal Modules
The Terminal Modules are the central interface for digital and analog inputs and outputs. You
can optionally expand the interface to include additional Terminal Modules.
3.5.3 Precharging
To prevent overcurrents and temporary overvoltages in the DC link when the line voltage is
connected, the DC-link capacitors must be precharged. The DC link is precharged via the
auxiliary supply.
The precharging circuit comprises the following components:
● Precharging transformer
● Diode bridge
● Precharging resistors
● Contactor for switching on and off
● Circuit-breaker
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 37
Detailed information about interconnecting the precharging components is provided in the
circuit manual. The component mounting locations are provided in the layout diagram.
Designation Value
Precharging time 1) 25 s
Precharging current in three-phase 400 V supply 20 A
Discharging time of the DC link TDISCH 1) ≈ 300 s
1) The time can vary depending on the system
3.5.4 Electromechanical door interlock system
The electromechanical door interlock system is designed to protect personnel, and is an
integral part of the safety concept. During operation and when the make-proof grounding switch
is open, all the doors are interlocked (with the exception of the door for the control section).
The electromechanical door interlock system ensures that the doors for the power unit cannot
be opened when the DC link voltage is above a defined threshold value. The control only
releases the door interlocking once the circuit breaker is safely open and the grounding switch
is closed. You can open the doors once released by the control.
The device cannot be switched on again until all the doors are closed. The doors remain
interlocked if the auxiliary voltage fails. For more information, refer to the Chapter
"Maintenance"
See also
Opening the doors (Page 189)
3.5.5 Make-proof grounding switch
The make-proof grounding switch grounds the voltage DC link. This ensures that no hazardous
voltages are present in the DC link when the doors are opened.
To ensure that the drive functions safely, the actuating lever for the make-proof grounding
switch must be removed.
3.5.6 Circuit-breaker (provided by the customer)
To ensure adequate protection for converters, the circuit-breaker provided by the customer
must fulfill the following requirements:
● The maximum time between when the circuit-breaker trips to when a no-current state (I=0)
is reached is 80 ms.
● The circuit breaker must be equipped with an undervoltage tripping function.
● Avoid additional delay times when controlling the circuit breaker. All commands from the
converter to the circuit breaker must act directly without intervention of coupling relays.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
38 Operating Instructions 04/2017
● A feedback signal must be available for each of the circuit-breaker states CLOSED and
OPEN. The feedback signals must not be delayed. Consequently, do not use any coupling
relays.
● The circuit-breaker is controlled and released from the converter closed-loop control. If this
has not been enabled, under no circumstances should you switch on the circuit-breaker by
external mechanical or electrical means.
● To protect the converter transformer, ensure that overcurrent protection is in place.
3.5.7 Converter transformer
A three-winding transformer is required for the 12-pulse Basic Line Module. The secondary
windings of the three-winding transformer have a phase shift of 30°el, which results in a 12-
pulse supply with correspondingly lower line harmonics.
With a 24-pulse Basic Line Module, two three-winding transformers are required. The
additional shifting of the primary-side windings for the two transformers by +7.5° or –7.5° allows
a 24-pulse supply to be generated. Instead of the two three-winding transformers, a five-
winding transformer can be used (after consultation with the transformer manufacturer).
Consider the following properties during the configuration:
● Short-circuit voltage uk ≥ 10% (in relation to 10 MVA)
● Transformer taps for voltage adjustments:
2 x 2.5%.
The winding transformer taps are normally located on the primary side of the transformer.
● The voltages and insulation for the secondary-side windings must be dimensioned as
shown in the following table:
Connection Single connection
Connection version
(see "Technical specifications")
Basic connection, 12-pulse infeed Series connection of the Basic Line
Module
Infeed transformers 1 three-winding transformer 2 three-winding transformers
Recommended vector group Dy5 Dd0 Dy5 Dd0
with primary shift + 7.5°
Dy5 Dd0
with primary shift - 7.5°
Converter output voltage
[kV]
Test voltage
[kV] 1)
Transformer secondary voltage (no-load voltage)
[kV]
3.3 33.6 2 x 1.7 2) 2 x 0.85 (2x) 3)
1) The specified voltage is the required impulse withstand / test voltage for the transformer
secondary windings with respect to ground. Because the transformers generally have
temperature evaluation systems in the windings, the specified test voltage is required for
strengthened insulation. If no control circuits have been installed in the windings, the test
voltage in accordance with the basic insulation is sufficient.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 39
2) Basic connection
3) Option
3.5.8 Power Stack Adapter
The Power Stack Adapter (PSA) acts as the physical interface between the power unit and
the open-loop/closed-loop controller. This is where the galvanic isolation (electrical coupling
via light) between the power unit and the open-loop controller takes place. Data is exchanged
between the Power Stack Adapter and the Control Unit via the DRIVE-CLiQ high-speed serial
communication interface.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
40 Operating Instructions 04/2017
①X11 – X14 Gating of the power semiconductors, inverter phase u
②X15, X16, Gating of the power semiconductors, crowbar
③X31 – X34 Gating of the the power semiconductors, inverter phase v
④X35, X36 Gating of the power semiconductors, braking chopper
⑤X51 – X54 Gating of the power semiconductors, inverter phase w
⑥X241, X242 Selecting Safe Torque Off
⑦X70 – X79 Actual value channels 0 to 9
⑧X81 Trip line
⑨X200 – X202 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
⑩X231, X232 Analog and digital outputs
⑪S5.0
S5.1
Switches of the analog inputs, voltage/current measurement AI0
Switches of the analog inputs, voltage/current measurement AI1
⑫X221, X222 Analog and digital inputs, temperature sensor connections
⑬LEDs Diagnostics via LEDs
⑭X210 Electronics power supply
Figure 3-4 Overview of PSA interfaces
See also
Gating of the power semiconductors (Page 239)
Selecting Safe Torque Off (Page 239)
Actual value channels (Page 240)
Trip line (Page 240)
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 41
DRIVE-CLiQ interface (Page 240)
Analog and digital outputs (Page 241)
Switch for the analog inputs (Page 241)
Analog and digital inputs and temperature sensor connections (Page 242)
LEDs of the Power Stack Adapters (Page 176)
Electronics power supply (Page 243)
3.5.9 Actual value acquisition
Actual current and voltage values are recorded by the AVT combination module ①. The AVT
combination module converts analog signals into digital signals and forwards them to the PSA.
The signals are transferred to the PSA via fiber-optic cables.
Figure 3-5 AVT combination module
The AVT combination is installed in the power unit.
3.5.10 Common power supply
3.5.10.1 Field of application
The common power supply (GSV) is an AC/AC converter that converts an alternating voltage
into a square-wave voltage. You can select one of the following rated voltages with associated
rated frequencies for the alternating input voltage:
● 1-phase 115 VAC / 60 Hz
● 1-phase 230 VAC / 50 Hz / 60 Hz
● 1-phase 240 VAC / 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
42 Operating Instructions 04/2017
On the front panel of the device there is a labeled switch with which the rated voltage can be
selected with the aid of a screwdriver. The square-wave voltage of 55 V generated from the
input voltage supplies four power outputs with equality of access. The design principle differs
according to which electronic component is to be supplied with the aid of the GSV.
Each power output is monitored for undervoltage. When the voltage level of all power outputs
is within the standard range, the LED signaling the status indication lights up green. The device
switches itself off automatically in the event of a short-circuit at one of the power outputs. The
associated LED of the affected power output lights up red until the short-circuit has been
rectified and the device is back in proper working order. This requires that the upstream
miniature circuit-breaker is opened and after approximately 10 seconds is closed again.
See also
Technical specifications of the common power supply (Page 235)
3.5.10.2 Design
6DIHW\WUDQVIRUPHU$FWXDOYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ&RPPRQSRZHUVXSSO\6ZLWFKLQJPRGXOH,*&76DIHW\WUDQVIRUPHU6DIHW\WUDQVIRUPHU6ZLWFKLQJPRGXOH,*&7$&9+]$&9+]+]$&9+]+]9999
Figure 3-6 Design when using IGCTs
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 43
3.5.10.3 Connections
①LED display for the power output ④Signaling
②Operating display ⑤Line connection
③Power outputs ⑥Line voltage selection
Figure 3-7 Overview
3.5.10.4 Interface description
Tasks of the interfaces
Connector Task
X1 Line connection
X2 Signaling
X6 / X7 / X8 / X9 Power output
Signal assignment of the interfaces
Connector/pin Signal
X1.3 L
X1.4 Not assigned
X1.5 N
X1.6 Not assigned
X1.7 PE
X2.4 Undervoltage REL_A
X2.5 Undervoltage REL_B
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
44 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Connector/pin Signal
X2.6 Presence of output voltage REL_A
X2.7 Presence of output voltage REL_B
X6.1 / X7.1 / X8.1 / X9.1 PE
X6.2 / X7.2 / X8.2 / X9.2 P-GRD
X6.3 / X7.3 / X8.3 / X9.3 ± 55 V
3.5.11 DM10 diagnostics module
3.5.11.1 Functions
The DM10 diagnosis module performs the following functions:
● Monitoring the auxiliary voltages of the internal 1P24 and 1N24 power supply.
● Monitoring the external voltage 2P24_1 and the optional external voltage 2P24_2 for
undervoltage.
● Monitoring the auxiliary contacts of the 24 V DC miniature circuit-breakers.
● Output of eight binary control signals. The logic state of the signal in each case is indicated
by an LED.
● Output of eight analog signals to the following signal receivers:
– PADU8
– Indicating instruments
– Control station/I&C
● Supply of the digital and analog signals to measuring sockets for simplified diagnosis with
an oscilloscope.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 45
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
Figure 3-8 Logical design of the DM10 diagnosis module
See also
Technical specifications of the diagnostics module DM10 (Page 235)
LEDs of the DM10 diagnostics module (Page 177)
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
46 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.5.11.2 Measuring socket assignment
The process data acquisition system (PADU8) is used for the diagnosis of analog and digital
converter signals. The process data acquisition system is designed as an optional component.
If the PADU8 is not included, the signals can be read out with the aid of an oscilloscope, for
example, at measuring sockets.
Figure 3-9 Printed circuit board of the diagnostics module
Measuring sockets Signal Measuring sockets Signal
X20/X28 or X29 AO_0 X26/X28 or X29 AO_6
X21/X28 or X29 AO_1 X27/X28 or X29 AO_7
X22/X28 or X29 AO_2 X14/X18 or X19 DO_4
X23/X28 or X29 AO_3 X15/X18 or X19 DO_5
X24/X28 or X29 AO_4 X16/X18 or X19 DO_6
X25/X28 or X29 AO_5 X17/X18 or X19 DO_7
3.5.11.3 Interface description of the connectors
The individual module elements of the DM10 diagnosis module supply several interfaces. The
interfaces are occupied by the following connectors:
X231 PSA connection
X232 PSA connection
X1 PADU8 connection (option G66)
X5 PADU8 connection (option G66)
X31 Closed-loop control interface
X32 Closed-loop control interface
X33 Binary process diagnosis with PADU8 (option G66)
X34 Closed-loop control interface
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 47
X35 Closed-loop control interface
X36 Closed-loop control interface
Connector assignment
Table 3-1 Connector -X231
Pin Signal type Signal designa‐
tion
Signal direction Measuring
sockets
Control signals
closed-loop
control
PADU8 (option
G66)
1 1M24 -X32:8
2 DO_3 Binary signal 3 → -X32:7
3 DO_2 Binary signal 2 → -X32:5
4 1M24 -X32:6
5 1M24 -X32:4
6 DO_1 Binary signal 1 → -X32:3
7 DO_0 Binary signal 0 → -X32:1
8 1M24 -X32:2
9 1M24 -X31:8 -X1:8
10 AO_3 Analog signal 3 → -X23 -X31:7 -X1:7
11 AO_2 Analog signal 2 → -X22 -X31:5 -X1:5
12 1M24 -X31:6 -X1:6
13 1M24 -X31:4 -X1:4
14 AO_1 Analog signal 1 → -X21 -X31:3 -X1:3
15 AO_0 Analog signal 0 → -X20 -X31:1 -X1:1
16 1M24 -X31:2 -X1:2
Signals DO_0 to DO_3 of connector -X32 are identical to signals DI_0 to DI_3 of connector -X231, which are supplied from
the PSA. An LED signals the logic state of the respective signals. These signals are not wired to the PADU8 interface.
The eight digital outputs of the PSA are used internally and are therefore preassigned, so not configurable. The eight analog
outputs of the PSA are freely parameterizable and can be used for commissioning and service purposes with the aid of the
starter. Follow the description in the Sinamics List Manual to parameterize the system.
Note
Preassignment of the analog outputs of the PSA
If the converter has optional door indicating devices, analog outputs AO_0 to AO_3 of the PSA
are preassigned.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
48 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Table 3-2 Connector -X232
Pin Signal type Signal designa‐
tion
Signal direction Measuring
sockets
Control signals
closed-loop
control
PADU8 (option
G66)
1 1M24 -X18 -X5:16
2 DO_7 Binary signal 7 → -X17 -X5:15
3 DO_6 Binary signal 6 → -X16 -X5:13
4 1M24 -X19 -X5:14
5 1M24 -X5:12
6 DO_5 Binary signal 5 → -X15 -X5:11
7 DO_4 Binary signal 4 → -X14 -X5:9
8 1M24 -X5:10
9 1M24 -X28 -X1:16
10 AO_7 Analog signal 7 → -X27 -X1:15
11 AO_6 Analog signal 6 → -X26 -X1:13
12 1M24 -X29 -X1:14
13 1M24 -X1:12
14 AO_5 Analog signal 5 → -X25 -X1:11
15 AO_4 Analog signal 4 → -X24 -X1:9
16 1M24 -X1:10
The eight digital outputs of the PSA are used internally and are therefore preassigned, so not configurable. The eight analog
outputs of the PSA are freely parameterizable and can be used for commissioning and service purposes with the aid of the
starter. Follow the description in the Sinamics List Manual to parameterize the system.
Table 3-3 Connectors -X1 and -X31
Plugs Pin Signal type Signal designation
-X1 and -X31 1 AO_0 Analog signal 0
-X1 and -X31 2 1M24
-X1 and -X31 3 AO_1 Analog signal 1
-X1 and -X31 4 1M24
-X1 and -X31 5 AO_2 Analog signal 2
-X1 and -X31 6 1M24
-X1 and -X31 7 AO_3 Analog signal 3
-X1 and -X31 8 1M24
-X1 9 AO_4 Analog signal 4
-X1 10 1M24
-X1 11 AO_5 Analog signal 5
-X1 12 1M24
-X1 13 AO_6 Analog signal 6
-X1 14 1M24
-X1 15 AO_7 Analog signal 7
-X1 16 1M24
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 49
Table 3-4 Connector -X32
Pin Signal type Signal designation
1 DO_0* Binary signal 0
2 1M24
3 DO_1* Binary signal 1
4 1M24
5 DO_2* Binary signal 2
6 1M24
7 DO_3* Binary signal 3
8 1M24
Signals DO_0 to DO_3 of connector -X32 are identical to signals DI_0 to DI_3 of connector -X231, which are supplied from
the PSA. An LED signals the logic state of the respective signals. These signals are not wired to the PADU8 interface.
Table 3-5 Connector -X33
Pin Signal type Signal designation Signal direction PADU8 (option G66)
1 DO_EO External binary signal 0 → -X5:1
2 1M24 -X5:2
3 DO_E1 External binary signal 1 → -X5:3
4 1M24 -X5:4
5 DO_E2 External binary signal 2 → -X5:5
6 1M24 -X5:6
7 DO_E3 External binary signal 3 → -X5:7
8 1M24 -X5:8
Four binary plant signals can be wired via connector -X33 for diagnosis with the PADU8.
Table 3-6 Connector -X34
Pin Signal type Signal designation
1 1P24 +24 V
2 1M24 Ground
3 1M24 Ground
4 1N24 -24 V
The internal supply voltlage is connected at connector -X34, from which the 1P15 and 1N15 supply voltages are generated
for the analog amplifiers. At the same time, comparators monitor these two voltages for undervoltage.
Table 3-7 Connector -X35
Pin Signal type Signal designation
1 2P24_1 External +24 V
2 2P24_2 Signal monitoring input for external +24 V
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
50 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Pin Signal type Signal designation
3 2M24 Ground
4 2M24 Ground
5 HK_1 Auxiliary contact: A1
6 HK_2 Auxiliary contact: A2
The external supply voltage 2P24 is connected at connector –X35. This voltage, supplied from a 10 A power supply unit, is
selectively distributed via several single-pole miniature circuit-breakers. Their auxiliary contacts can be wired to HK_1 and
HK_2. In addition, a further external power supply 2P24_2 can be monitored for undervoltage.
Table 3-8 Connector -X36
Pin Signal type Signal designation
1 PS_OK Power Supply OK
2 2M24 Ground
Connector –X36 informs the closed-loop control system of the monitoring state.
3.5.11.4 Signal processing
Tasks of the operational amplifier
The Power Stack Adapter returns analog signals within a range of values from 0 V to 10 V to
the DM10 diagnosis module. Because of this fixed value range, signed signals such as the
actual speed value cannot be represented. Eight AD8674 operational amplifiers boost the
voltage signal (reduced by 5 V) by a factor of 2. As a result of this signal handling, it is also
possible to represent signals in a range of values from -10 V to +10 V.
In order to be able to perform signal handling with great accuracy, the operational amplifiers
must satisfy the following criteria:
● Low noise: 2.8 nV/√Hz
● Large bandwidth: 10 MHz
● Low quiescent input curent: max. 12 nA
● Low offset voltage: max. 75 μV
The signals are relayed to the following interfaces:
● For diagnosis to the process data acquisition system (option G66).
● For alternative diagnosis with the aid of indicating instruments (option K21/K22).
● Via additional isolation amplifiers to the control station / I&C.
● For simplified diagnosis with an oscilloscope to measuring sockets X20 to X27.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 51
Tasks of reference module AD586LR
The reference module installed on the DM10 diagnosis module supplies the reference voltage
for voltage subtraction of the eight analog signals. The reference voltage of 5 V is subtracted
from the input signal in the value range from 0 V to 10 V. The voltage supplied by the reference
element must meet demanding requirements in terms of signal accuracy.
The reference element must satisfy the following signal accuracy criteria:
● High linearity
● Low drift
● Voltage deviation of max. ±5 mV
The signal accuracy of the AD586LR reference element is within the permitted tolerance range
with a deviation tolerance of ±2.5 mV.
3.5.11.5 Voltage monitoring
Tasks of the comparators
The internal voltages are connected via connector -X34 and the external voltages via connector
-X35. These voltages are required for supplying the diagnosis module. At the same time these
voltages are monitored for undervoltage, and the logic signal state is visualized by one LED
in each case. If all the voltages being checked are within the standard range, another LED
(H23) signals "Power Supply OK". Connector -X36 carries the information about the status of
the power supply to the closed-loop control system. If the status of the power supply is reported
to the closed-loop control system as "Power Supply Not OK", the control system intervenes
and shuts down the drive in a controlled manner in order to prevent damage to the drive.
Switching thresholds for voltage monitoring
Input voltage Signal type Connecting terminal Switching threshold
1 signal
Switching threshold
0 signal
+24 VDC 1P24 -X34:1 19.47 V - 19.62 V 18.98 V - 19.12 V
-24 VDC 1N24 -X34:2 19.47 V - 19.62 V 18.98 V - 19.12 V
+24 VDC 2P24_1 -X35:1 19.47 V - 19.62 V 18.98 V - 19.12 V
+24 VDC 2P24_2 -X35:2 19.47 V - 19.62 V 18.98 V - 19.12 V
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
52 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.5.12 Re-cooling unit
3.5.12.1 Re-cooling unit requirements
The re-cooling unit must comply with the following requirements:
● The raw water to be supplied by the plant flows through the heat exchanger that cools the
deionized water. To limit the volume of the deionized water, a re-cooling unit with a dual-
circuit system is required. Limit the deionized water circuit to the re-cooling unit and the
drive.
● The design of the re-cooling unit is part of the system integration. This affects, in particular,
deviations from the required environmental conditions, such as aggressive cooling water.
Use heat exchanger plates made of titanium for aggressive cooling water, such as sea
water or high chloride content. If necessary, also consider an increased corrosion for the
design.
● In the variant as water-air re-cooling unit, the heat loss is dissipated to the ambient air using
a separate installed heat exchanger. If you expect air temperatures below 0° C, you must
install a water-glycol intermediate circuit. Glycol is not permitted in the ionized-water circuit.
The measuring units and the control of the electrical equipment are evaluated in the re-
cooling unit. The supplier calibrates the measuring units in accordance with the order
specifications.
● Any failure of the re-cooling unit causes the immediate shutdown of the drive. If the re-
cooling unit is provided by the system integrator, take this into consideration for the
configuring.
● Use two redundant circulating pumps. No interruption of the flow is permitted. The only
exception is a pump shutdown. The shutdown time must not exceed three seconds.
● Provide an overpressure valve in the raw water discharge of the heat exchanger. To keep
the temperature of the ionized water constant within specified limits and to prevent
condensation, on request, a control valve (tree-way valve) can be installed as bypass.
Because the valve is controlled depending on the temperature of the deionized water, up
to approx. 100% of the raw water can be conveyed past the heat exchanger.
● Acquire the temperature of the raw water with a sensor and evaluate the data.
● To reduce the raw water consumption, the flow quantity can be reduced. A reduction,
however, is possible only when the raw water does not contain any suspended matter that
could accumulate in the heat exchanger for a slower flow speed.
● Procure timely any consumables and spare parts from the supplier of the re-cooling unit.
3.5.12.2 Operating principle of the re-cooling unit
The re-cooling unit dissipates the heat loss from the drive. The deionized water in the internal
water circuit absorbs the heat of the drive power unit which is to be dissipated, and is pumped
to the heat exchanger by a maintenance-free circulating pump. The warm deionized water is
cooled by the external raw water circuit and pumped back to the drive.
Two pipes are installed in the drive. The cold water of the re-cooling unit flows in one of the
pipes, and is heated by the losses and flows back to the re-cooling unit through the other pipe.
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 53
3.5.12.3 The internal deionized water circuit
The internal water circuit is filled with deionized water (deionized, fully-desalinated water). The
conductivity of the cooling water must be ≤ 1 µS/cm in operation.
NOTICE
Inadmissible additives in the deionized water
Inadmissible additives in the deionized water can cause the cooling system to fail. This could
damage the drive.
● Use only deionized water that corresponds to the specifications. The specification of the
deionized water can be found in the documentation for the re-cooling unit.
Deionized water requirements
Deionized water requirements
Table 3-9 Deionized water requirements
Value
Conductivity during filling < 10 μS/cm
Evaporation residue < 20 mg/l
pH value 5 to 9
● Content of metals in the hydrogen sulfide group (lead,
antimony, tin, bismuth, arsenic, copper, cadmium)
● Content of metals from the ammonium sulfide group (iron,
cobalt, nickel, chrome, manganese)
● Content of sulfur chloride and nitrogen compounds
Not detectable
Content of oxidizable, organic substances Max. a quantity equivalent to the
usage of 30 mg/l potassium per‐
manganate KMnO4
3.5.13 Customer terminal strips
The default setting and interfaces of the customer terminal strips can be found in the circuit
manual. For information about the position of the customer terminal strips within the cabinet,
see the layout diagrams.
See also
Terminal assignments (Page 236)
Description
3.5 Description of the components
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
54 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6 Description of options
3.6.1 NAMUR terminal strip (option B00)
The NAMUR command source is a terminal strip that is equipped with isolation amplifiers and
relays and is located upstream of Terminal Modules TM31 and TM15.
Note
The inputs and outputs assigned to the terminals fulfill PELV (Protective extra-low voltage)
requirements.
The NAMUR terminal strip fulfills the requirements and guidelines of the standards association
for measurement and control technology in the chemical industry (NAMUR recommendation
NE37).
On the NAMUR terminal strip, certain device functions are assigned to fixed terminals. The
fixed assignment between drive signals and the NAMUR terminals represents your
standardized control logic in the converter and fulfills the requirements for protective separation.
To monitor the temperature of explosion-protected motors, options for PTC tripping devices
with PTB approval and PT100 for use in hazardous areas are available.
See also
Terminal assignment of the NAMUR terminal strip (option B00) (Page 237)
3.6.2 Auxiliary voltage supply 3 AC 200 V 50 Hz (option C30)
The auxiliary voltage of 3AC 200 V 50 Hz provided is adapted to the required auxiliary voltage
of 3AC 400 V.
The following components require a 3 3 AC auxiliary voltage supply:
● Fan
● Open-loop and closed-loop control
● Protection and monitoring equipment
● DC link precharging
● Re-cooling unit pumps
Refer to the drive technical data for auxiliary power supply current rating. The terminal
assignment is provided in the circuit diagram of the drive.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 55
3.6.3 Suitable for marine use with individual certificate from Lloyds Register (LR) (option
E21)
The design and implementation of the drive corresponds to the requirements of the Lloyds
Register classification society.
This option contains the following equipment/features:
● Strengthened mechanical cabinet design
● Handrail below the operator panel
● Mechanical cabinet door locking
● Cabinet design in an IP44 degree of protection
● Anti-condensation heating
The drive can be welded to the ship's hull structure.
See also
Anti-condensation heating (option L55) (Page 66)
3.6.4 Isolation amplifiers for optional analog inputs (option E86)
This option provides two isolation amplifiers if an additional TM31 Terminal Module is provided
as an extension of the customer interface and the TM31 analog inputs are to be used with a
higher-level control level for communication purposes. Multifunction interface converters with
the following adjustment range are used:
● 0 V to 10 V
● 0 mA to 20 mA
● 4 mA to 20 mA
The range must be set on the isolating transformer.
3.6.5 Isolation amplifiers for optional analog outputs (option E87)
This option provides two isolation amplifiers if an additional TM31 Terminal Module is provided
as an extension of the customer interface and the TM31 analog inputs are to be used with a
higher-level control level for communication purposes. Multifunction interface converters with
the following adjustment range are used:
● 0 V to 10 V
● 0 mA to 20 mA
● 4 mA to 20 mA
The range must be set on the isolating transformer.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
56 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.6 Can Bus interface (option G20)
The standard version of the drive is equipped with a PROFIBUS interface (slave).
Communication Boards CBC10 and CBE20 are used to link the drive to the CANopen bus
system.
For more information about communication modules, see document "Supplementary
component descriptions".
3.6.7 Modbus RTU Slave interface (option G22)
Using the Anybus X-Gateway communication module, the converter can be connected to the
Modbus RTU third-party bus system.
The standard version of the drive is equipped with a PROFIBUS interface (slave). The "Anybus-
X-Gateway" supplied by HMS Industrial Networks is used to link the drive to the third-party
bus system. The X gateway is connected to the CU320 Control Unit using a PROFIBUS cable.
The option is supplied with a null modem cable for configuring the X gateway. The gateway is
preconfigured to 20 bytes of I/O data. The data size is changed via the configuration interface
from a PG/PC (standard PC tool "Windows Hyper Terminal").
Use the "NetTool" supplied by HMS Industrial Networks to configure PROFIBUS. The NetTool
is not included in the scope of supply.
3.6.8 1x temperature sensor evaluation unit TM150 (option G51)
This option comprises a temperature sensor evaluation unit TM150.
Terminal Module TM150 is used for sensing and evaluating several temperature sensors.
Terminal Module TM150 is designed to connect a maximum of 12 temperature sensors.
For more information, see document "Supplementary component descriptions".
3.6.9 Additional Terminal Module TM31 (option G61)
One TM31 and two TM15 Terminal Modules are already part of each standard variant of the
drive. The Terminal Modules are used for the following functions:
● Inclusion of warning and fault messages and control signals
● Communication with a higher-level control level.
If the number of signals to be monitored is insufficient, the interface can be extended to include
an additional Terminal Module. Additional digital inputs and outputs and two analog inputs and
outputs are available with the TM31. The inputs and outputs are used, for example, for fetching
temperatures.
The TM31 Terminal Module provides the following inputs and outputs:
● 8 digital inputs
● 4 bidirectional digital inputs and outputs
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 57
● 2 relay outputs with changeover contact
● 2 analog inputs
● 2 analog outputs
● 1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130/PTC)
Note
The second TM31 must be connected at the plant site.
The default setting of the inputs/outputs is not provided by the factory and must be
undertaken according to the requirements of the respective plant during commissioning.
When the analog inputs and outputs on the optional TM31 are used for communicating with
the control level, additional isolating transformers are available (optional).
3.6.10 Additional Terminal Module TM15 (option G63)
One TM31 and two TM15 Terminal Modules are already part of each standard variant of the
drive. The Terminal Modules are used for the following functions:
● Inclusion of warning and fault messages and control signals
● Communication with a higher-level control level.
With the optional additional Terminal Module TM15, you can also expand the number of digital
inputs and outputs. The expansion makes sense for the following applications:
● Reading in and processing external signals in addition to the existing terminal strip available
as standard.
● Controlling external components.
The Terminal Module TM15 comprises the following elements:
● 24 bidirectional digital inputs and outputs (isolation in three groups of eight channels).
● 24 green status LEDs for indicating the logical signal status of the relevant terminal
3.6.11 PADU8 diagnosis module (option G66)
The PADU8 diagnosis module can read up to eight analog and eight digital signals from the
control and monitoring module in the power unit. The PADU8 makes these signals available
for further processing for diagnostic purposes. The typical acquisition cycle of all channels in
parallel is 1 ms which allows rapid signal characteristics to be acquired and diagnosed
simultaneously. The acquired values are transferred to an evaluation system (e.g. notebook)
either via fiber-optic conductors or via an RJ11 socket. All the output data is available on both
the fiber optic cable output and the RJ11 socket simultaneously. This means that
measurements can be taken on the RJ11 socket without disrupting data transfer via the fiber
optic cable.
With this option, a PADU8 diagnosis module is integrated in each control section.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
58 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.12 Indicator lamps in the cabinet door (option K20)
This option provides five lamps in the cabinet door of the control section that indicate the
operating status of the drive.
● Fault (red)
● Alarm (yellow)
● Operating (green)
● Ready for operation (white)
● Operation in local mode (white)
3.6.13 Display instruments in the cabinet door for voltage, current, speed, and output
plus indicator lamps (option K21)
Analog display instruments that display process variables as % are integrated in the cabinet
door:
● Motor current (0 to +120%)
● Motor speed (–120% ... 0 … +120%)
● Calculated motor power (0 to +120%)
● Motor voltage (0 to +120%).
Note
Option K21 contains option K20.
3.6.14 Sensor Module SMC30 (option K50)
The SMC30 (Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 30) evaluates motor encoder signals. The
sensor module transfers the speed and actual position value to the Control Unit via the internal
DRIVE-CLiQ communication interface.
Note
If an encoder fails, the mode can be switched over to "encoderless".
For more information, please refer to “Supplementary component descriptions” on the
converter CD.
See also
Connecting the encoder to the SMC30 Sensor Module (Page 106)
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 59
3.6.15 dv/dt filter (option L10)
The drive generates pulses at the drive output which have a negative impact on the motor
insulation. The dv/dt filter is used to limit the voltage gradient to max. 1 kV/µs. At the same
time, the dv/dt filter is used to limit the capacitive recharging currents of the motor cables, and
therefore protects the motor insulation system. The dv/dt filter is integrated in the power unit.
①Drive
②Motor
R1,R2,R3 6 Ω dv/dt filter resistance
L1, L2,L3 20 μH dv/dt filter reactor
C1,C2,C3 1 μF dv/dt filter capacitor
M Center of the drive
N Center point of the dv/dt filter
Figure 3-10 Circuit diagram option L10
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
60 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Connecting the motor to the dv/dt filter
Figure 3-11 Connecting the motor to the dv/dt filter
Restrictions when using the dv/dt filter
● The drive may be operated only with following maximum currents:
– 4 kA drive: 1680 A (without filter 1750 A)
– 5 kA drive: 1780 A (without filter 1850 A)
● The pulse frequency of the drive must not exceed 200 Hz.
● The permissible output frequency of the drive must not exceed 100 Hz.
● The following line length between the filter output and the motor is permitted with shielded
cables (cable cross-section 185 mm2):
– 200 m when six parallel cables are used
– 400 m when three parallel cables are used
● The re-cooling unit requires 10 liter more flow
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 61
3.6.16 dv/dt filter (option L11)
The input filter is used to limit the voltage gradient to max. 1 kV/µs. At the same time, the input
filter is used to limit the capacitive recharging currents of the line cables and so protects the
transformer insulation system. The input filter is integrated into the power unit.
①Transformer
②Drive
R1,R2,R3 6 Ω Filter resistor
L1,L2,L3 20 μH Filter reactor
C1,C2,C3 1 μF Filter capacitor
M Center of the drive
N Center point of the dv/dt filter
Figure 3-12 Circuit diagram option L11
Usage restrictions for the input filter
● The drive may be operated only with following maximum currents:
– 4 kA drive: 1680 A (without filter 1770 A)
– 5 kA drive: 1780 A (without filter 1870 A)
● The following line length between the filter output and the transformer is permitted with
shielded cables (cable cross-section 185 mm2):
– 200 m when six parallel cables are used
– 400 m when three parallel cables are used
● The re-cooling unit requires 10 liter more flow
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
62 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.17 Automatic restart function (option L32)
When the automatic restart function (option L32) is implemented, the drive is switched on again
automatically once the power has been restored after a power failure (regardless of how long
the power failure lasted). Alarms are acknowledged automatically and the drive is restarted.
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
With the automatic restart option, a Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 is integrated in the drive.
The VSM10 acquires the actual voltage values at the medium-voltage level upstream of the
circuit-breaker.
When the medium voltage is restored after a power failure, this is detected by the open-loop/
closed-loop controllers via voltage converters when the input-side circuit-breaker has dropped
out. The voltage converters should be located at the medium-voltage level upstream of the
circuit-breaker.
For safety reasons, a time limit between the power failure and the maximum permissible power
restoration time is incorporated to ensure that the drive does not restart in an uncontrolled
manner. As a further warning, an acoustic signal is output when the drive restarts.
You can find further information on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10) in Section
"Description of the Components".
Prerequisites
To switch in the drive via the optional automatic restart function, the following general
conditions must be fulfilled:
● The auxiliary supplies must not fail.
● The power supply for the fans, coolant pumps, and the open-loop/closed-loop controllers
must be maintained.
If the main infeed fails, the pulse block is initiated. The DC link is supported for a short time
using the precharge.
Starting the drive from standstill
This function is suitable for drives with small inertia loads and load torques where the drive
can be brought to a standstill within seconds, such as pump drives with water gauges.
Starting the drive with the flying restart function
This function can also be activated as follows: The function is suitable for drives with high
inertia loads (e.g. fan drives). This function can be used to switch the drive to the motor that
is still rotating.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 63
Failure of the auxiliary supply
If the main infeed fails, the following possibilities are available:
● The input-side circuit-breaker is still closed.
When the medium-voltage supply system has been restored, the DC-link voltage increases.
This increase is detected by the closed-loop and open-loop controllers.
When a threshold value is exceeded, operation is resumed.
● The input-side circuit-breaker has tripped.
After a fixed, definable time, the circuit-breaker receives an "ON" command.
The system then checks the DC-link voltage.
If the DC-link voltage continues to decrease, the drive is switched off.
If the DC-link voltage increases, operation is resumed when a threshold value is exceeded.
Note
Restriction when the drive is operated via the AOP in LOCAL mode
The automatic restart function cannot be used in conjunction with the AOP30 in LOCAL mode.
When the drive is operated in LOCAL mode, the AOP30 cancels the "ON" command to the
circuit-breaker if fault OFF1, OFF2, or OFF3 occurs.
3.6.18 Line-side grounding switch (option L48)
When the make-proof grounding switch is closed, this option allows motor-driven make-proof
grounding switches that ground the line-side input voltage to be controlled automatically.
The motor-driven make-proof grounding switches are installed in an additional cabinet.
For safety reasons, the drive controller prevents the make-proof grounding switches from being
switched when voltage is still present. Activation is integrated in the protection and monitoring
sequence of the drive. The make-proof grounding switches are closed automatically when the
standard make-proof grounding switch of the DC link is closed.
3.6.19 Motor-side grounding switch (option L49)
Under the following circumstances, operating modes can occur for which there is the danger
that the motor returns power to the drive:
● Operating mode / variant of the load machine, e.g. drive group with gas turbine
● Type of drive machine, e.g. permanently excited motor
resulting in hazardous voltages.
When the make-proof grounding switch is closed, this option allows motor-driven make-proof
grounding switches that ground the motor-side output voltage to be controlled automatically.
The motor-driven make-proof grounding switches are installed in an additional cabinet.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
64 Operating Instructions 04/2017
For safety reasons, the drive controller prevents the make-proof grounding switches from being
switched when voltage is still present. Activation is integrated in the protection and monitoring
sequence of the drive.
3.6.20 Cabinet illumination and service socket in closed-loop control unit (option L50)
One universal light with service socket is installed in each cabinet element for the trigger and
control section. The universal light and the power socket are supplied externally with power
and must be fused with max. 16 A.
The cabinet illumination can be switched on manually or automatically by means of an
integrated motion detector (default setting). If the light is switched on by the motion detector,
it stays on for three minutes. The mode is selected via the switch on the light.
The terminal assignment is provided in the circuit diagram of the drive.
3.6.21 Disconnector at the drive output (option L51)
With this option, a motor-operated isolator is integrated at the drive output.
If manual isolation between the drive output and drive motor is required for protection and
safety reasons, this can be achieved by means of the motor-operated isolator.
3.6.22 Circuit breaker at the drive output (option L52)
With this option, a circuit-breaker is integrated at the drive output. If isolation between the drive
output and drive motor is required for protection and safety reasons, this can be achieved by
means of the circuit-breaker. The circuit-breaker is controlled from the drive controller. When
an ON command is issued, the output-side circuit-breaker is activated along with the auxiliary
equipment. When an OFF command is issued, the circuit-breaker is deactivated.
3.6.23 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (option L53)
The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) ensures that the control system continues to run
because the line voltage is protected. The following conditions must be met in order that the
drive can continue to operate:
● The DC-link voltage does not undershoot the Ud min limit
● The medium-voltage switch does not switch off because of undervoltage.
If kinetic buffering is activated, drives with large moments of inertia can bridge voltage brown-
outs or short power failures. The kinetic buffering supports the DC-link voltage.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 65
3.6.24 Anti-condensation heating (option L55)
The anti-condensation heating is used at low ambient temperatures and high levels of humidity
to prevent condensation from forming. The heating is controlled via a thermostat.
The number of anti-condensation heaters is set in accordance with the number of cabinet
panels.
The converter monitors and signals if the external supply for the anti-condensation heating
fails.
See also
Safety instructions for maintenance (Page 183)
3.6.25 EMERGENCY STOP Category 1 (option L60)
Emergency Off, stop category1 (24 VDC) for controlled stop according to IEC60204.
In the standard version, Emergency Off stop category 0 is set for an uncontrolled stop. It also
has a function for disconnecting the drive from the power supply via the circuit-breaker. The
motor coasts down. The Emergency Off, stop category 1 function includes rapid stopping of
the drive using a deceleration ramp to be parameterized by the user. Voltage is then
disconnected from the drive as described for Emergency Off, stop category 0.
The EMERGENCY OFF button with protective collar is installed in the drive cabinet door.
WARNING
Danger from auxiliary voltages that are connected
When you press the EMERGENCY STOP button, the motor is stopped either uncontrolled
or controlled depending on the selected category 0 or 1, and the drive blocks the inverter, in
line with IEC60204-1 (VDE0113).
Auxiliary voltages such as those for separately-driven fans or anti-condensation heating are
still present. Certain areas within the drive also remain under voltage, e.g. the control function
or auxiliaries. When touching these auxiliary voltages, this can result in death or serious
physical injury.
Ensure that the EMERGENCY OFF button is integrated in the safety system for the whole
machine so that all the voltages are completely disconnected. For this purpose, an NC contact
is installed at terminals =.LA–X51:1A or 1C and =.LA–X51:2A or 2C.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
66 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.26 Braking Module (option L72)
This option uses a Braking Module with connected braking resistor to permit braking operation.
The structure of the Braking Module is similar to that for a phase of the Motor Module. The
braking resistor is not included in the scope of supply but is available as option Y73. An external
load resistor is provided as the braking resistor.
Braking power
Table 3-10 Braking power of the Braking Module with external braking resistor
Converter
output volt‐
age
Required braking
resistance (± 10%)
Braking resistance
supply voltage
Braking power Brak‐
ing Module
P
20
Braking power Brak‐
ing Module
P
DB
3.3 kV 3.2 Ω 5.8 kV 4000 kW 1) 4000 kW
1) Values can be higher for brief periods (in the range of seconds).
Note
The above data is valid for maximum continuous output of the Braking Module.
3.6.27 Safety locking system (option M10)
The safety locking system is based on the key transfer system developed by Castell. It is a
supplementary mechanism to the electromechanical door locking system integrated as
standard. The medium-voltage breaker must be opened before access can be gained to the
coded key of the key exchange unit. The opened medium-voltage breaker releases the key to
the key exchange unit. This key enables the access to the keys for the cabinet doors of the
power unit. This key interlocking system ensures that the converter is disconnected from the
medium-voltage supply and that no cabinet components are connected to medium voltage.
As long as the cabinet doors are not closed again and the keys to the power-unit cabinet are
not inserted back in the key exchange unit, the key for the medium-voltage breaker will not be
released. The medium-voltage breaker cannot be switched on again.
See also
Secure locking system (option M10) (Page 191)
3.6.28 Power cable connection at the drive input from above (option M13)
You can introduce the line-side power cable into the cabinet from the top.
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 67
3.6.29 Signal and control cable (max. 2.5 mm²) (option M32)
Signal and control cables are connected directly to the terminals on Terminal Module TM31
or TM15 as standard. The maximum connectable cross-section for these cables to the TM31
and TM15 Terminal Modules is limited to 1.5 mm2.
With option M32, you can connect signal and control cables with connection cross-sections of
up to 2.5 mm2 to a terminal strip via cage clamp terminals.
3.6.30 IP54 degree of protection (option M54)
This option increases the degree of protection of the drive from IP43 to IP54.
3.6.31 Redundant fan in the power unit (option M61)
To increase the plant availability, the drive can be fitted with an additional, redundant fan. If a
fan in the drive cabinet fails, this is detected immediately by the differential pressure monitor
in the cabinet. The redundant fan is switched in by the drive controller without this causing the
drive and, in turn, the drive system to fail. This prevents production failures or interruptions.
The replacement of the defective fan can be postponed to the next planned stoppage.
3.6.32 Suitability for marine use (option M66)
The converter design corresponds to the requirements of the following classification societies.
● Lloyds Register
● American Bureau of Shipping
● Germanischer Lloyd
● Bureau Veritas
● Det Norske Veritas
● Chinese Classification Society
The converter has the following supplementary equipment:
● Salt water resistant paint
● Strengthened mechanical cabinet design
● Handrail below the operator panel
● Mechanical cabinet door locking
● IP44 degree of protection
● Anti-condensation heating
The converter can be welded to the ship's hull plate
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
68 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3.6.33 Controlled outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment 400 V 3 AC (option N30)
This option includes a controlled outgoing feeder for external auxiliaries (3 AC 400 V, max.
4 KW). The controlled outgoing feeder is protected by a circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
setting range is cos phi = 0.8 (7 A up to 10 A).
The option can be used to operate external fans on motors and pumps and oil supply units.
The "ON" command at the drive closes the contactor. The "OFF" command opens the
contactor.
Externally provide the necessary drive power supply. The terminal assignment is provided in
the circuit diagram of the drive.
3.6.34 Sine-wave filter (option Y15)
This option allows line motors or motors with insulation systems that are not compatible with
drives to be operated with speed control. The sine-wave filter supplies the motors with virtually
sinusoidal motor currents and voltages, which means that line motors can be used. Standard
cables (without EMC shielding) can also be used between the sine-wave filter and the motor.
When sine-wave filters are used, the voltage harmonic distortion at an output frequency of 50
Hz is less than 5%. When the sine-wave filter is used, refer to the performance data (see the
technical specifications). Only work machines with square load characteristic curve (centrifugal
pumps and water turbines) can be operated. Field-weakening operation is not permitted.
Possible rated output frequencies are limited to a range of 30 Hz to max. 66 Hz. The frequency
setting range is 1:10.
Table 3-11 Max. permissible cable lengths
Permissible maximum cable lengths (shielded and unshielded cables)
Without sine-wave filter With sine-wave filter
100 m 1000 m
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 69
Connecting the motor to the sine-wave filter
A Basic configuration
B Parallel connection
C Parallel connection, two separate winding systems
Figure 3-13 Connecting the motor to the sine-wave filter
Description
3.6 Description of options
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
70 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Preparations for use 4
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
See also
Safety instructions (Page 19)
4.1 Requirements for installation location
The cabinet units are suitable for installation in general operating areas (to
DIN EN 60146-1-1 / VDE 558 T11 and DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 (IEC 62103), degree of
contamination 2; without conducted contamination). For this reason, SINAMICS devices must
be protected in such a way that they cannot be touched directly when they are being installed
in general operating areas.
The operating areas must be dry and free of dust. The air supplied must not contain any
electrically conductive gas, vapors, or dust which could impair operation.
For information about permissible ambient and installation conditions, see the "Technical data
and drawings" section.
4.2 Inspections when receiving the delivery
4.2.1 Checking the delivery
The components are assembled on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the delivery,
please check immediately whether the scope of the delivery matches up with the
accompanying documents. No claims relating to defects/items missing from the delivery will
be accepted if they are submitted at a later date.
● Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately.
● Immediately report any apparent defects/missing components to your contact partner.
These Operating Instructions are part of the scope of delivery; keep them in a location where
they can be easily accessed.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 71
4.2.2 Scope of delivery
The scope of delivery includes the following components:
● Power unit, incl. closed-loop control
● Excitation cabinet (for synchronous motors only, can be ordered separately)
● Re-cooling unit (optional)
This documentation relates to the complete system without the re-cooling unit.
4.2.3 Checking shock and tilt indicators
The purpose of shock and tilt indicators
The unit is equipped with shock and tilt indicators to monitor for damage during transit. It is
essential that you check the shock and tilt indicators before commissioning the unit.
WARNING
Tripped shock and tilt indicators
Safe operation of the device is not guaranteed if the shock or tilt indicator has tripped
(responded)
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● If one of the indicators has tripped, do not perform any commissioning.
● Inform the Technical Support. Only specialist Siemens technicians can recommend
appropriate measures.
See also
Service & Support (Page 229)
Preparations for use
4.2 Inspections when receiving the delivery
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
72 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Location and display of the indicators
You can find the indicators at the following locations:
● The tilt indicators are located in the upper third of the cabinet.
If the arrow above the line ① is blued, the tilt indicator has tripped.
● The shock indicators are located at the bottom of the cabinet.
If one or both arrows ② are black, the shock indicator has tripped.
Figure 4-1 Example of attaching and displaying the shock and tilt indicators
4.2.4 Checking the load handling attachments
Check the load suspension devices before lifting and transporting (such as lifting lugs and
eyebolts) and the lifting gear:
● Inspect the load suspension devices attached to the equipment for possible damage.
Replace load suspension devices if they are damaged.
● Before use, check that the load suspension devices are correctly attached.
● When lifting, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated capacity.
Check the lifting gear prior to its use.
WARNING
Load suspension devices and lifting gear damaged
If the load suspension devices and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured, the
equipment may be dropped during lifting and transportation. This can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use.
Preparations for use
4.2 Inspections when receiving the delivery
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 73
4.3 Transportation
The terms are defined as follows in the following part of the instructions:
● "Transportation unit" refers to the unit before it has been unpacked
● "Cabinet" refers to the unit after it has been unpacked
4.3.1 Transport markings
The packing differs depending on the transport type and size. If not otherwise contractually
agreed, the packaging corresponds to the packing guidelines for International Standards for
Phytosanitary Measures (ISPM).
Note the symbols which appear on the packing. These have the following meanings:
Top Fragile material Keep dry Keep cool Center of
gravity
Do not use
hand hook
Attach here
4.3.2 Transport requirements
● Persons driving cranes and fork-lift trucks must hold appropriate licenses.
● You must observe the specifications to avoid transport damage to the enclosure and you
must maintain the permissible climatic conditions during operation in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-1/2/3. Please also observe the "Technical specifications" instructions.
● When lifting the drive, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders of
sufficient rated capacity. Check these before using them. The weight of the drive is specified
on the rating plate.
● When lifting, refer to the information on the lifting plate or in "Technical data and drawings."
Comply with the specified spreading angles.
NOTICE
Vibrations
Significant vibration during transportation and shocks when setting down can damage the
equipment.
Avoid vibrations and shocks.
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
74 Operating Instructions 04/2017
4.3.3 Observe center of gravity
WARNING
Non-observance of center of gravity specifications
The cabinet is heavy. The center of gravity can be in the upper half of the cabinet. The unit
can tip over if you transport it incorrectly – or if you use transport equipment that is not
permitted for the purpose. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Ensure that only trained personnel transport the device with approved transport equipment
and lifting tools.
● Observe the center of gravity specifications. A label or stamp is attached to each
transportation unit and precisely shows the center of gravity of the cabinet.
● Do not tilt the device or allow it to fall.
The following figure shows the centers of gravity as an example: Carefully note the centers of
gravity when performing any lifting or installation work.
)URQWYLHZ6LGHYLHZ
Figure 4-2 Example illustration of centers of gravity
4.3.4 Transport with a fork-lift truck
WARNING
Use of non-approved fork-lift trucks
If the forks are too short, this can cause the transport unit/cabinet to tip over resulting in death,
serious injury, or damage to the cabinet.
The forks of the truck must protrude at the rear of the transport pallet. The floor panels of the
transport units will not support a load.
Only use fork-lift trucks approved for this purpose to transport the units.
When the transport units are transported or moved with a fork-lift truck, the force is absorbed
through the transport pallet.
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 75
Observe the following points for safe transport:
● Transport the transport unit/cabinet with the greatest care.
● Choose the lowest transport height possible. The pallet may not touch the ground. Always
transport the cabinet in an upright position.
● Avoid driving over bumps.
4.3.5 Transport with a crane
WARNING
Improper transport
If the transport unit is not properly transported with a crane, the transport unit/cabinet could
fall or tip over This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Make sure that you read the safety information about transportation and the information
provided on the transport unit (e.g. center of gravity specifications).
WARNING
Use of inappropriate cross-arms
If inappropriate cross-arms are used, the transport unit or cabinet can tip over. This can result
in death, serious injury or material damage.
Observe the specifications provided in DIN EN 13155 on cross-arms.
WARNING
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load suspension devices were to fail, the transport unit/cabinet could fall.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Do not stand underneath or near to a raised load.
Observe the following points for safe transport:
● When using a crane to transport the equipment, keep to the permissible lifting capacity.
Pay attention to the center of gravity position.
● If the cabinet center of gravity is off-center, use suitable lifting equipment, e.g. a lifting beam.
● If the cabinet has eye hooks, use them. In such cases, do not use any lifting rods.
4.3.6 Using lifting rods
During transportation with a crane, force is absorbed by the supporting frame of the cabinet.
The supporting frame remains on the unit. The device is mounted at the installation site via
the supporting frame.
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
76 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
Transporting the option cabinet
When transporting an option cabinet, the force is absorbed via the screwed-on U sections.
Remove the U sections after transporting the cabinet.
Note
Lifting bars
The lifting bars are not included in the scope of delivery.
WARNING
Inadequately dimensioned lifting rods
Inadequately dimensioned lifting rods are liable to bend or break. The drive could drop off the
crane. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Use suitable lifting rods for transporting. The weight of the cabinet is indicated on the rating
plate.
NOTICE
Improper lifting
If the transport unit is lifted incorrectly, this can damage the decorative trim, cabinet doors,
or fans.
Protect the cabinet and protruding parts against damage.
Always lift the transport units with the appropriate spreading devices or hoisting tackle.
Procedure
1. If there are several holes, select which holes to use based on the center of gravity.
2. Push the lifting bars through the holes.
Figure 4-3 Lifting bar label
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 77
3. Place the sling ropes on the lifting bars so they are close to the cabinet. Secure the ends
of the lifting bars using the splint.
Figure 4-4 Securing the lifting rods
4. To lift the transport unit, use single sling ropes or two ropes with a cross stitch. Attach the
crane rope to the lifting rods so it is close to the cabinet.
5. Lift the cabinet. Avoid shifting the center of gravity or distorting or damaging the cabinet.
When suspended, the cabinet must be parallel to the ground.
4.3.7 Transporting transportation units packed in boxes
Transportation with the fork-lift truck
WARNING
Use of non-approved fork-lift trucks
If the forks are too short, this can cause the transportation unit/the device to tip over resulting
in death, serious injury, or damage inside the cabinet.
The forks of the truck must protrude at the rear of the transportation unit.
Only use forklifts approved for the purpose of transporting the devices.
Transportation with the crane
WARNING
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load suspension devices were to fail, the transportation unit/the cabinet
could fall. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
Do not stand underneath or near to a raised load.
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
78 Operating Instructions 04/2017
To protect the boxes against pressure, use sufficiently long rope and a spreader beam. Please
proceed as follows:
1. Attach the rope/cable to the pallet as shown in the following diagram.
2. Attach the rope/cable to the spreader beam ① and the crane hook.
3. Pay attention to the center of gravity imprinted on the box ② and the imprinted position of
the ropes ③.
4. Carefully raise the transportation unit.
①Spreader beam
②Center of gravity
③Imprinted position of the rope
Figure 4-5 Transporting a transportation unit (still in packaging) with a crane
4.4 Unpacking
4.4.1 Removing the packaging
NOTICE
Incorrect storage of unpacked devices
Proper packaging ensures that the equipment is protected. Unpackaged equipment may be
damaged if it is stored or out of service over a long period.
Carefully observe the instructions for storage in Chapters "Storage" and "Technical data and
drawings". Remove the packaging immediately prior to installation.
The units are packed by the manufacturers in accordance with the order.
Preparations for use
4.4 Unpacking
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 79
In order not to damage open mounting parts (e.g. pipes and busbars), take the following
measures when removing the foil and the load securing devices:
● Remove the foil and load securing devices carefully.
● Remove the packaging immediately prior to installation. Protect the cabinets against dust
until they have been commissioned. To do this, cover the ventilation openings and keep
the doors closed.
● Do not remove the safety instructions and center of gravity specifications from the cabinet.
4.4.2 Removing load securing devices
WARNING
Fixing materials can come under tensile stress
If fixing materials are released suddenly during opening and people get in the way, this could
result in bodily injury or death.
Release the retaining straps before opening. Stay out of the way of the impact direction of
the retaining straps.
NOTICE
Improper removal of the load securing devices
The load securing device protects the cabinet from any damage. If you remove the load
securing device improperly, the cabinet may sustain damage.
Correctly remove the load securing device.
To extract the load securing device, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the retaining straps.
2. Remove the spacers such as wooden wedges, air cushions, etc.
4.4.3 Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet
Use a crane to lower the transportation units from the transport pallets and transport them to
the installation site. Observe the guidelines described in the section "Transport with a crane."
Preparations for use
4.4 Unpacking
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
80 Operating Instructions 04/2017
4.4.4 Opening doors in preparation for use
NOTICE
Incorrectly opening the doors
If you incorrectly open the doors, then this can damage the locking mechanism.
● When opening the doors, follow the steps described.
● You must replace a damaged locking mechanism before commissioning, which will be
charged for. Contact the service center in this regard. You can find the relevant contact
person under "Service & Support".
4.4.4.1 Opening doors in preparation for use
The converter is delivered in a closed state. A label showing how to open the doors in a current-
free state is located on the door.
Figure 4-6 Example: Label with instructions for opening the doors
Proceed as follows:
1. A screw marked with a label is located in the door. Under the screw you will find the opening
for manually opening the doors. Remove the screw.
Figure 4-7 Example: Cover screw for manual door interlocking
2. Insert a screwdriver into this opening.
Preparations for use
4.4 Unpacking
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 81
3. Turn the door handle until you feel resistance.
4. Remove the screwdriver from the opening.
5. Open the doors.
After opening the doors, remove the label with the instructions for safety reasons. The label
is only required for opening the doors the first time.
4.4.5 Checking the shock and tilt indicators inside the cabinet.
Shock and tilt indicators are also located inside the cabinet. Check these as soon as you have
unpacked and opened the device. To perform the check, proceed as described in "Checking
shock and tilt indicators"
See also
Checking shock and tilt indicators (Page 72)
4.5 Storage
4.5.1 Emptying the drive
NOTICE
Unemptied cooling system
The coolant can corrode the components over the long term. Coolant can also freeze at
temperatures of below 0° C causing damage to the drive.
Make sure that the coolant has been completely removed from the system before the device
is placed in storage.
If the drive is stored for a longer period of time, then close and seal all water intakes and
discharge points to protect against vermin and dirt.
If the drive was already connected to the cooling system and you want to store the drive away
again, empty the drive completely prior to storing. To empty the drive proceed as follows:
1. Open the connection between the cabinet piping and the external piping.
2. Drain the coolant.
3. Then tighten the screws again.
4. At one of the flanges of the cabinet piping, connect oil-free compressed air or a nitrogen
bottle. Use a suitable transition element. Blow out any residual water.
Preparations for use
4.5 Storage
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
82 Operating Instructions 04/2017
NOTICE
Blow-out pressure too high
If the blow-out pressure used exceeds 6 bar, the piping and the heat sink can become
damaged.
Do not exceed the blowout pressure of 6 bar. Avoid pressure surges.
4.5.2 Storing a device
If you are not going to commission the device immediately after delivery, ensure that it is stored
correctly.
Preconditions and preparations
● Store goods only in undamaged packaging. Unpack the goods if the packaging is damaged.
Correctly store the goods corresponding to the type of goods.
● Repair any damage to the packaging before putting the equipment into storage insofar as
this is necessary to ensure proper storage conditions.
General instructions for storage
Wherever possible, store the device in a storage room. The place of storage must satisfy the
following general conditions:
● Select a sufficiently sized dry and horizontal place of storage that is above flood level and
free of vibration (veff ≤ 0.2 mm/s).
● The place of storage must be well ventilated as well as free of dust and frost.
– Provide protection against extreme weather conditions.
– Optimum temperatures are between 10° C (50° F) to 50° C (120° F).
– Room temperature should be approx. 10 °C (14 °F) above the outside temperature.
– The temperature may not fall below ‑20 °C (-4 °F).
– For lower temperatures, agree on suitable measures together with Siemens.
– Relative humidity should be less than 60%.
– The floor of the place of storage must be sufficiently strong. Do not exceed maximum
permissible floor load levels or storage compartment load levels.
– The ambient air must not contain any harmful gases.
● Protect the device against shocks and humidity.
Preparations for use
4.5 Storage
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 83
● In order to ensure protection against ground moisture and water, place the equipment and
crates on pallets, wooden beams or foundations.
● Ensure that the air circulation under the equipment is not impeded.
– Place wooden spacer blocks between the covers and the device.
– Do not place covers or tarpaulins completely around the equipment on the floor.
NOTICE
Improper storage
Incorrect or excessively long storage can damage the equipment.
● Do not store the device outdoors.
● Observe the specified conditions for storing the device.
● Ensure that it is not stored for longer than the permissible maximum of two years.
Protection against humidity
● If a dry storage area is not available, then take the following precautions:
– Wrap the device in humidity-absorbent material. Then wrap the device in film so that it
is airtight.
– Place a humidity meter that can be read from outside inside the film wrapping. Observe
the values provided in the technical specifications on relative humidity. Check the values
regularly using the humidity meter.
– Inspect the device regularly.
Preparations for use
4.5 Storage
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
84 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Installation 5
5.1 Safety instructions for assembly
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
NOTICE
Improper installation
The devices can be damaged through improper installation.
Install the devices as described in the following sections. Take note of the ambient
temperatures stated in the technical specifications. Protect the drive against excessive stress
and loading.
WARNING
Defective seals
When working on the device, seals at the doors, roof panels as well as front, rear and side
panels can be damaged. Operating the device with defective seals can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
Replace the defective seals before commissioning. Observe the environmental conditions
stated in the technical data.
WARNING
Dirt deposits during installation
Dirt gets deposited in the open converter during installation work. Dirt deposits can lead to
the converter no longer fulfilling the requirements for cleanliness. If the converter is operated
with internal pollution, death, serious injury and material damage can result.
Therefore, remove dirt deposits after installation. Then keep the doors closed.
In the event of contamination from conductive dust particles (e.g. from welding work),
professional cleaning will be required. Contact the service center in this regard.
NOTICE
Foreign bodies in the drive
If, after installation and maintenance work, foreign bodies are left in the drive, this can damage
it when switching on.
Before switching on, check as to whether there are any foreign bodies in the drive. Remove
any foreign bodies.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 85
NOTICE
Installation of the re-cooling unit on its own
The transmission of mechanical vibrations may, for instance, cause cracks in the piping or
other mechanical damage.
If the re-cooling unit is screwed to the drive this may be damaged.
Install the re-cooling unit on its own, without a screw connection to the drive.
5.2 Tools required
Installation of the connections requires the following tools:
● Wrench or socket wrench, width across the flats 10, 13, 16/17, 18/19
● Allen key, size 8
● Torque wrench up to 50 Nm
● Screwdriver, size 2
● Torx T20 and T30 screwdrivers
5.3 Attaching side panels
WARNING
Side panels that are not attached
Voltages of over 1000 V are present when this equipment is operational. If the device is
operated without side panels, this can result in death or serious injury.
Make sure that the side panels are installed on the left and right outer ends of the drive.
A basic unit consists of two transportation units (modules). There is a side panel on the left-
hand side of each transportation unit. Mount the side panels of each transportation unit to the
correct side. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Arrange the transportation units in accordance with the specifications provided in the
dimension drawings.
2. Make sure that on the left-hand transportation unit ② the side panel is mounted on the left-
hand side.
3. If the drive comprises more than two transportation units, then disassemble the side panels
of the following transportation units.
4. Mount the side panel of the last transportation unit from the left to the right-hand side.
Installation
5.2 Tools required
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
86 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Examples of the arrangement of the side panels
˂/
①Re-cooling unit
②Transportation unit
Figure 5-1 Connecting two transportation units
˂/;;
①Re-cooling unit
②Transportation unit
Figure 5-2 Connecting four transportation units
5.4 Screwing the transport units together
NOTICE
Stress
Stress that occurs during transport may exert mechanical pressure on the components.
Material damage can result.
● Line the cabinets up precisely with each other in order to avoid shearing forces when the
base units are screwed together.
● Install the drive only on a level and horizontal surface.
Preparatory steps
1. Ensure that access to the holes in the bottom of the cabinets is unobstructed.
2. Remove the guard covers.
Installation
5.4 Screwing the transport units together
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 87
Screwing cabinets together
The cabinets are supplied with the following mounting hardware for the purpose of screwing
them together:
● Hexagon nuts ISO 4032-M10-8 A2L
● Hexagon screws ISO 4017-M10x45-8.8-A2L
● Hexagon screws ISO 4017-M10x140-8.8-A
● Washers DIN9021-10.5-140HV-A2L
● Spring washer VHD 10-1.4310
Proceed as follows to screw the cabinets together:
1. Remove the canopy panel-
2. Align the cabinets.
3. Insert the M10 screws through the mounting holes at the upper and lower sides of the
cabinet. The arrangement of the mounting holes is provided in the dimension drawing.
Select a suitable screw length depending on the location.
4. Place the washers and spring washer onto the screw.
5. Screw the transport units together using the nuts with a torque of 65 Nm.
6. Attach the canopy panel.
5.5 Connecting to the foundation
Preparatory steps
1. Ensure that access to the holes in the bottom of the cabinets is unobstructed.
2. Remove the guard covers.
Securing the cabinet to the floor
The following details are specified in the dimension drawing:
● Mounting holes
● Mounting dimensions
● Distance between the cabinet top and the room ceiling
Holes are provided for M12 screws for securing the cabinet to the foundation.
Install the transportation units in accordance with the specifications provided in the
accompanying dimension drawings in "Layout diagrams and dimension drawings".
Installation
5.5 Connecting to the foundation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
88 Operating Instructions 04/2017
5.6 Connecting cabinets
DANGER
Insufficient grounding
The drive must be grounded to ensure that it operates safely and reliably. If the drive is
operated with insufficient grounding, then the protection and monitoring functions can fail.
Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Always apply all of the necessary protective measures.
● Always observe the five safety rules when working with the drive.
● Follow these steps when grounding the machine:
– Establish the connections in a cabinet.
– Ensure that the connections are also established over several cabinets.
– Establish the ground connection for the whole plant immediately.
If several cabinets are set up as one unit, they must be connected to each other. A connection
jumper is supplied with each cabinet. To screw several cabinets together, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the M12 nut ① on the first cabinet. Remove the nut, the washer and the connection
jumper ②.
2. Loosen the M12 nut ① on the second cabinet. Remove the nut and the washer.
3. Place the connection jumper ② on the support for the connection jumper in the cabinets
to be connected.
4. Refit the washer and nut.
5. Tighten the nut (torque: 50 Nm).
①M12 nut; washer
②Connection jumper
Figure 5-3 Connecting cabinets
Installation
5.6 Connecting cabinets
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 89
See also
Torques (Page 201)
5.7 Connecting the DC bus
If several cabinets are set up as one unit, you must connect the DC bus of the individual
cabinets with each other.
The following mounting material is provided:
● Combination screws SN60736-C-M8x16-Z4-L-8.8A
A pack contains 50 items per bar package. 42 are required, with the remainder serving as
reserve.
● Hexagon screws ISO 4017-M8x20-8.8-A2L
5 items with washers are included.
Installation
5.7 Connecting the DC bus
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
90 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Please proceed as follows:
1. Connect the connection jumper ① to the DC bus ②.
2. Screw the connection jumper firmly in place using the supplied screws with a torque of 15
Nm.
①Connection jumper
②DC bus
Figure 5-4 DC-bus connection
5.8 Connecting the interface terminals
Connecting the interface terminals of several cabinets
If several cabinets are set up as one unit, the interface terminals of the cabinets must be
connected with each other.
Installation
5.8 Connecting the interface terminals
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 91
Depending on the design of the cabinet, sockets for connecting the interfaces are located on
the left-hand side (viewed from the front), below or above. The connectors are provided at the
same position on the other cabinet.
1. Insert the plug ② into the corresponding socket ①.
①Interface terminal
②Connector
Figure 5-5 Example: Connecting interface terminals
5.9 Connecting the water circuits
CAUTION
Deionized water
Deionized water is harmful to eyes and skin and can damage surfaces.
● Therefore, use appropriate protective clothing for all work on the drive. However, if your
eyes or skin do come into contact with deionized water, rinse the affected area thoroughly
with tap water as soon as possible.
● If deionized water leaks out, eliminate the source of the problem and remove the liquid
from the surfaces affected.
NOTICE
Damage caused by foreign bodies in the cooling system
Foreign bodies in the cooling system can cause blockages in individual circuits. As a result,
the water-cooled components overheat and the drive fails.
For this reason, make sure that no foreign bodies can enter the water circulation system. Only
remove the protective cover immediately prior to connecting the water circuit.
Installation
5.9 Connecting the water circuits
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
92 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Connect the re-cooling unit
Connect the deionized water circuit of the re-cooling unit to the deionized water piping of the
drive. Refer to the associated information about the ionized-water connections in the dimension
drawing.
5.10 Installing the battery of the uninterruptible power supply
Prerequisites
The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is supplied without a battery. For this reason, please
order a battery (article number 6SL3988-6YX00-0AA0). You can find the relevant contact
person under "Service & Support".
Procedure
1. The five safety rules must be observed.
2. Remove the polycarbonate cover above the uninterruptible power supply.
3. Remove the screws ① above and below the uninterruptible power supply.
Figure 5-6 Remove the screws
4. Remove the uninterruptible power supply so that you can take off the operator panel.
5. Remove the screw ② securing the battery holder in place.
6. Carefully remove the battery holder.
Installation
5.10 Installing the battery of the uninterruptible power supply
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 93
7. Insert the battery pack ③.
Figure 5-7 Install battery
8. To reinstall the uninterruptible power supply, perform steps 2 to 6 in reverse order.
9. Remove the "UPS without battery pack" label from the converter.
Installation
5.10 Installing the battery of the uninterruptible power supply
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
94 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Electrical connection 6
6.1 Safety instructions for electrical connections
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
WARNING
Insufficient degree of protection as a result of inadequate sealing of the cable entry
If the cable entry is not correctly sealed, it is possible that the drive no longer complies with
the requirements for the specified degree of protection.
If the drive is operated with an insufficient degree of protection, death, serious injury, and
material damage can result.
To maintain the drive's degree of protection, after connecting the cable, seal the cable entries
so they are air-tight immediately.
WARNING
Insufficient degree of protection as a result of modifying the floor/roof panel
If you make any changes to the floor panel or the roof panel in order to modify the cable entry,
the changes may result in the drive no longer meeting the requirements for the degree of
protection shown. If there are holes in the floor or roof panel, then animals and vermin, for
example, can get into drive during operation.
If the drive is operated with an insufficient degree of protection, death, serious injury, and
material damage can result.
To maintain the drive's degree of protection, seal the holes so they are air-tight immediately
after installation.
WARNING
Defective seals
When working on the device, seals at the doors, roof panels as well as front, rear and side
panels can be damaged. Operating the device with defective seals can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
Replace the defective seals before commissioning. Observe the environmental conditions
stated in the technical data.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 95
WARNING
Short-circuits
Damaged cables, or their improper routing, can cause damage to property and personal
injury.
● Only use cables that are completely intact and not damaged. Correctly route the cables.
Do not interchange input and output terminals.
● Make sure that a short-circuit cannot occur on the power cables due to failure of the
insulation as a result of incorrect cable installation.
● Check the electrical connections after service work.
NOTICE
Using magnetizable parts
The use of magnetizable parts, e.g. ferrous cable clamps, is not permitted. The use of
magnetizable parts can damage the converter.
Only use parts that consist of non-magnetic material.
NOTICE
Improper shrinking of cable terminations
If you are connecting the mains and motor-side power cables, when shrinking the cable
terminations, other control lines and fiber-optic cables in the surrounding cable channels can
become damaged.
When shrinking, ensure not to damage cables in the surrounding cable channels.
NOTICE
Incorrectly opening the doors
If you incorrectly open the doors, then this can damage the locking mechanism.
Open the doors as described in Section "Preparing for use".
Note
Control and signal lines must always be connected according to the circuit diagrams supplied
with the unit. Detailed information about connecting the components is given in the
interconnection diagram.
Note
We recommend using shielded cables. Unshielded cables can transfer disturbances to the
control and signal lines and lead to malfunctions in the drive.
Electrical connection
6.1 Safety instructions for electrical connections
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
96 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
To ensure trouble-free operation without interference or disturbances, route the power cables
and signal lines separately. Interference, for example, will result in the device not behaving as
expected.
When connecting and routing power and signal cables, observe the instructions contained in
the "Electromagnetic compatibility" section.
See also
Electromagnetic compatibility (Page 97)
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
The following fundamental information and guidelines facilitate compliance with the EMC
directives.
Note
We recommend that EMC is planned for the entire plant.
Cabinet installation
● Connect painted or anodized metal components using contact washers or remove the
insulating layer.
● Use unpainted, de-oiled mounting plates.
● Establish a central connection between ground and the protective conductor system (PE
protective conductor).
Cable installation
● Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each
other as possible.
● The distance between the electric power cable and signal cable should be > 20 cm. The
converter-specific information applies to power cables. You can find further information on
power cables under "Connecting power cables".
● When the cables are routed close to ground potential, the immunity to interference is
increased. For this reason, you are advised to lay these cables along edges and at ground
potential.
● Ground the reserve cores on at least one end.
Electrical connection
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 97
● In order to avoid additional locations where interference can be coupled in, long cables
should be shortened or routed where there is little interference.
● If conductors or cables conduct signals of different classes, then the conductors and cables
must cross at a right angle. This especially involves sensitive and noisy signals.
– Class 1:
Unshielded cables for ≤ 60 V DC
Unshielded cables for ≤ 25 V AC
Shielded analog signal cables
Shielded bus and data cables
Operator panel interfaces, incremental/absolute encoder cables
– Class 2:
Unshielded cables for > 60 V DC and ≤ 230 V DC
Unshielded cables for > 25 V AC and ≤ 230 V AC
– Class 3:
Unshielded cables for > 230 V AC/V DC and ≤ 1000 V AC/DC
– Class 4:
Unshielded cables for > 1000 V AC/DC
Shield connection
● Do not use cable shields to conduct current. In other words, cable shields must not
simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors.
● Apply the cable shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area. Use ground
clamps, ground terminals or ground screw connections.
● Avoid extending the cable shield to the grounding point using a wire. This reduces the shield
effectiveness by up to 90%.
Electrical connection
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
98 Operating Instructions 04/2017
● Attach the cable shield to a shield busbar directly after the line inlet into the cabinet. Insulate
the shielded cable without any interruptions. Route the cable shield up to the device
connection.
①Shield busbar
②Shielded cable
③Mounting clip
Figure 6-1 Shield connection using a clip
NOTICE
Damaged or incorrectly mounted cable shielding
Incorrect connection or damaging of the cable shield can impair the function of the system.
● Handle the cable shield carefully.
● Ensure that the cable shield is correctly connected.
● Bridge shield gaps (at terminals, circuit-breakers, contactors, etc.) with minimum
impedance and through the largest possible surface area.
①Shield busbars
②Cables
③Terminals
Figure 6-2 Bridging shield gaps
Electrical connection
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 99
I/O connection
● Create a low-impedance ground connection for additional cabinets, system components,
and distributed devices with the largest possible cross-section (at least 16 mm²).
● Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet.
● Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables (at least 20
cm). The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in parallel, the greater the
clearance must be. You must install additional shields if sufficient clearance cannot be
maintained.
● Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops.
● Surge suppressors, e.g. RC elements or varistors must be connected to the operating coils
for contactors and relays in the converter.
● In order to reduce noise/interference entering or exiting via the cable, filter auxiliary voltages
in the control cabinet.
6.3 Potential concept
A noise-free connection between the internal and external supply voltage can be achieved by
connecting the 0 V potentials to each other and grounding them. This also eliminates the need
for the control circuit insulation monitor required by DIN EN 60204-1.
,QWHUQDOORDGV([WHUQDOORDGV30301
Figure 6-3 Potential concept
6.4 Electrical requirements
Table 6-1 Dimensioning cables
Object Length
Cable length (motor side) 100 m with one or two parallel ca‐
bles;
Cables must be shielded
500 m with output reactor (option
L08)
Capacitance per unit length max.
0.45 µF/km
Cable length (line side) 300 m
Electrical connection
6.3 Potential concept
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
100 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Table 6-2 Cable cross-sections
Object Cross-section Comments
Power cable Max. 240 mm2Max. six parallel power cables
Cabinet protective conductor Max. 120 mm² -
See also
Torques (Page 201)
6.5 Connection
6.5.1 Manually unlocking power-unit doors
To ensure operator protection, the drive is equipped with an electromechanical door
interlocking system. The doors cannot be opened until the make-proof grounding switch has
been closed. In the event of a complete voltage failure including failure of the auxiliary voltage,
the doors cannot be released via the grounding switch.
Because the drive is not yet connected, the doors are locked electromechanically. In order to
facilitate assembly and installation of the drive, the doors can be opened manually.
See also
Opening the doors (Page 189)
6.5.2 Preparations for connecting the power cables
● Disconnect the cabinets from the power supply.
● Ensure that all the necessary safety measures have been taken at the installation location.
● Allow unimpeded access to the cable clamping bar in the cabinets.
6.5.3 Connecting power cables
Note
The screws and accessories are not included in the scope of delivery.
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 101
①Contact surface
Figure 6-4 Example: Connecting the power cables
1. Clean the contact surfaces immediately before screwing the connections. Use spirit and a
lintless cloth for cleaning.
2. Apply a thin film of grease. Electrolube 2G is a suitable lubricator.
3. Screw the cable lug with a M12 screw and, if necessary, with a washer to the contact
surface. Tighten the nuts with a torque of 50 Nm.
6.5.4 Connect the power cable to the motor and the supply system
When connecting the cables, observe all the conditions regarding conductor protection. Do
not exceed the permitted cable lengths between the converter output and motor. The distance
between the motor cable and the signal cable should be at least 20 cm. Do not lay grid-side
and motor supply cables in parallel to each other.
The positions of the connections are shown in the layout diagrams. Detailed wiring notes for
the converter are contained in the circuit manual of the converter.
Select the appropriate cable depending on the following conditions:
● Routing conditions
● Accumulation of cables
● Ambient temperature
● Bending radii
● Output voltage
Observe the connection capabilities on the converter and on the motor terminal box.
Procedure
1. Open the cabinet.
2. Remove or slide away the cover plate for the motor cable penetration.
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
102 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
To route the power cables from above into the cabinet, remove the cover plate at the top of
the cabinet.
NOTICE
Danger of thermal damage
Inadequately fastened cables at the connection point represent a high electrical transfer
resistance that can cause thermal damage (contact erosion) during operation.
Tighten the screws with the specified torque.
1. Screw the protective ground at the provided locations in the cabinet to the appropriate
connection with the ground symbol.
Note
Connect the motor cables first and then the power cables.
2. Connect the infeed cable to the supply-system connection busbar.
8:98:9
ʪ
Figure 6-5 Connection of the supply-system power cable
3. Screw the individual phases of the motor cable to the connections below of the output
phases.
Observe the following connection sequence of the conductors: 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 and 2U1,
2W1, 2V1
Direction of motor rotation
Connect asynchronous machines with clockwise phase sequence (looking at the drive shaft)
to the drive as follows:
Table 6-3 Drive and motor connection terminals
Drive (connection terminals) Motor (connection terminals)
U2/ U
V2/ V
W2/ W
In contrast to the connection for the clockwise phase sequence, two phases have to be
reversed with a counter-clockwise phase sequence (looking at the drive shaft).
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 103
Note
If an incorrect phase sequence was connected during the cable installation and it cannot be
corrected by a subsequent swapping of the motor cables, you have two possibilities:
● Change the phase sequence by entering a negative setpoint.
● Change the phase sequence with the drive parameterization.
Note
Interconnect the windings for motors that can be operated in star-delta correctly. To do this,
read the motor documentation. Observe the required isolation voltage for the operation of the
drive.
6.5.5 Connecting ground
DANGER
Insufficient grounding
The drive must be grounded to ensure that it operates safely and reliably. If the drive is
operated with insufficient grounding, then the protection and monitoring functions can fail.
Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
To ensure the correct functioning of the protection and monitoring equipment, ground the
device.
Each cabinet has a grounding lug for grounding the components installed in the cabinet. It is
located at the bottom of the cabinet. Connect the cabinets securely to the plant grounding
system via these grounding lugs.
Figure 6-6 Grounding lug
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
104 Operating Instructions 04/2017
6.5.6 Connect the auxiliary voltage
Connect the auxiliary voltage 1-phase 230 VAC / 50 Hz
Connect the auxiliary voltage for, e.g. SITOP, GSV, closed-loop control, open-loop control, to
the terminal strip ①. The maximum permissible conductor cross-section is 4 mm2.
With options C30 - C49, the auxiliary voltage can be drawn from the matching transformer.
You will find notes in the circuit manual of the drive.
Connect the auxiliary voltage 3-phase 400 VAC / 50 Hz
1. Connect the auxiliary voltage for fans, precharging, etc. to the terminal box ②. The
maximum permissible conductor cross-section is 50 mm2.
2. To connect the cables, move the cover upward.
3. Attach the cables to the appropriate connections.
For detailed information, see "Terminal strips" and the circuit manual of the drive.
See also
Terminal assignments (Page 236)
①Terminal strip
②Terminal box
Figure 6-7 Connection for auxiliary voltages
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 105
6.5.7 Connecting the encoder to the SMC30 Sensor Module
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Incorrectly connected external encoder
If the external encoder is not connected or operated correctly, this can damage the
components.
Only one measuring system can be connected to each sensor module.
The sensor module is wired internally to the customer terminal strip. For further information,
see the circuit manual.
Note
Observe the five safety rules when performing any work.
Procedure
1. Allow unimpeded access to the SMC30 Sensor Module.
2. Disconnect the cabinet from the power supply.
3. Route the cables from the encoder into the cabinet from below.
4. Route the cable further up into the cabinet.
5. Connect the encoder cables ① to the SMC30 Sensor Module.
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
106 Operating Instructions 04/2017
6. Connect the shield of the encoder cable directly to the shielding bus (serrated bar). It is
important here to establish the greatest possible area of contact and a good conductive
connection.
7. Attach the shield of the connecting cable to the module ②. Use metal ground clamps to
secure the shield in place.
ཱ
Figure 6-8 Connecting the external encoder to the SMC30 Sensor Module
Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
*URXQGHQFRGHUVXSSO\(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9&75/7UDFN%7UDFN%7UDFN$7UDFN$*URXQG5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO55HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5;;..08E....
Figure 6-9 Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 107
Always use the bipolar connection because its physical transmission properties are more
robust. Only if the encoder type employed does not output push-pull signals should you use
the unipolar connection.
6.5.8 Interconnecting optional connections
Depending on the range of options installed, further connections have to be interconnected.
Detailed information about interconnecting these options with the interfaces is provided in the
circuit manual.
See also
Terminal assignments (Page 236)
6.5.9 Connecting the re-cooling unit to the drive
Connect the enclosed cable for the cooling unit to the corresponding interfaces on the drive
and the cooling unit.
Further details are contained in the circuit diagram of the drive and the re-cooling unit.
6.5.10 Fastening the cable ducts with cable ties
Fasten all cable ducts whose cover faces downward with cable ties. Wind the cable ties around
the entire cable duct. The cable ties must be located at the same positions as in the delivered
state.
Figure 6-10 Schematic diagram: Fastening the cable ties
Electrical connection
6.5 Connection
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
108 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Start-up 7
Only personnel trained for this type of drive may commission the drive.
WARNING
Incorrect commissioning
Malfunctions can occur as a result of incorrect commissioning and parameterization. This can
result in premature failures and subsequent damage to the drive and the drive system
components. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Incorrectly
performed commissioning can result in the warranty becoming null and void.
This drive may only be commissioned by electrical technicians that have been adequately
trained on this product, and have experience with commissioning this product and the
associated plant and system components. The electrical technician commissioning the
equipment must be trained on the specific product as a result of the differences between the
individual products, e.g. regarding topology and closed-loop control.
Obtain information about the range of SITRAIN training courses available through your local
contact person. Make use of the support and services offered by the responsible Siemens
Service Center when commissioning this equipment. You can find the relevant contact person
under "Service & Support".
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
7.1.1 Hardware components required for PROFIBUS communication
Set up a PROFIBUS interface to perform the commissioning with STARTER.
Required hardware components:
● Prefabricated PROFIBUS or MPI cable
● Field PG
● CP5512 interface adapter (when a laptop is used)
● CP5611 interface card (when a PC is used)
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 109
7.1.2 PROFIBUS interface, diagnostics LEDs, address switches
The PROFIBUS connection, diagnostics LEDs, and the PROFIBUS address switch are located
on the CU320 Control Unit.
5'<'3,23702'
5'<'323702'ཱི
①X126 PROFIBUS connection
②PROFIBUS diagnostics LEDs
③PROFIBUS address switches
Figure 7-1 PROFIBUS interface
X126 PROFIBUS interface ①
Figure 7-2 X126 PROFIBUS connection
Table 7-1 PROFIBUS interface X126
Pin Signal name Meaning Range
1 - Not assigned
2 M24_SERV Power supply for teleservice, ground 0 V
3 RxD/TxD–P Receive/transmit data P (B) RS485
4 CNTR–P Control signal TTL
5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential
6 VP Supply voltage plus 5 V +- 10%
7 P24_SERV Power supply for teleservice, +24 V 24 V (20.4 V to 28.8
V)
8 RxD/TxD–N Receive/transmit data N (A) RS485
9 - Not assigned
Start-up
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
110 Operating Instructions 04/2017
NOTICE
Damage to components
If CAN cables are connected to the X126 interface, the CU320 or other CAN bus nodes can
be damaged.
Do not connect any CAN cables to the X126 interface.
Note
A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface X126 for remote
diagnostics purposes.
The power supply for the teleservice (terminals 2 and 7) can have a load of up to 150 mA.
Diagnostics LED ②
The meaning is explained in the table below.
Table 7-2 Description of the DP1 LEDs
Color Status Description
----- Off Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Note:
If the Control Unit is operational, the PROFIdrive is ready for communication. The DP1
LED illuminates.
Green Continuous light PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is taking place.
Green 0.5 Hz flashing light Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place.
● The controller is not transferring any setpoints.
During isochronous operation, no or a faulty global control (GC) is transferred by the
controller.
Red Continuous light Cyclic communication has been interrupted.
PROFIBUS address switches ③
The PROFIBUS address switch is located under the cover.
ི
Figure 7-3 PROFIBUS address switch cover
Start-up
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 111
7.1.3 Connecting PROFIBUS cables
The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with/without a programming device/
PC connector.
352),%86FRQQHFWRUVZLWKRXW3*3&FRQQHFWLRQ(6%$;$352),%86FRQQHFWRUVZLWKSURJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&FRQQHFWLRQ(6%%;$
Figure 7-4 PROFIBUS connectors
1. Connect the cables to the PROFIBUS connector. The bus terminating resistors are located
in this connector.
2. Connect the cable shield over a wide area on both sides.
Switching the bus terminating resistor on and off
1. Activate the bus terminating resistor at the two ends of the bus line.
2. Deactivate the bus terminating resistor at all other connectors.
)LUVWEXVQRGH%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ/DVWEXVQRGH)URPWKHSUHYLRXVEXVQRGH7RWKHQH[WEXVQRGHRQRIIRQRIIRQRII
Figure 7-5 Position of the bus terminating resistors
Start-up
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
112 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
Switch the bus terminating resistor on or off depending on its position on the bus, otherwise
the data will not be transmitted properly.
7.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS address switches
Set the PROFIBUS address of the CU320 Control Unit for the PROFIBUS communication.
You have several options for setting the PROFIBUS address:
● Parameter p0918 (default setting)
– Parameter p0918 can be used to set the PROFIBUS address only when the address is
set to 0 or 127 using the DIP switches. Set all switches S1 to S7 to ON or OFF (default
setting). If the address is changed, the new setting does not become effective until the
CU320 Control Unit is switched on.
– The set PROFIBUS address is saved by means of the "Copy RAM to ROM" function.
● Using the DIP switches on the CU320 Control Unit
Move switches S1 to S7 to the required position to set the PROFIBUS address.
Switch
S1 20 0 1
S2 21 = 2
S3 22 = 4
S4 23 = 8
S5 24 = 16
S6 25 = 32
S7 26 = 64
If you set the PROFIBUS address using the DIP switches S1 to S7, the parameter p0918 is
read-only. The parameter shows the set address of the control unit. If the address is changed,
the new setting does not become effective until the CU320 Control Unit is switched on.
Example of setting the PROFIBUS address using DIP switches
In this example, PROFIBUS address 37 is set.
212))66
Significance
6212))6
Example
Start-up
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 113
Note
The PROFIBUS address switches have a default setting of 0 or 127 (set via parameter p0918).
7.1.5 Requirements for communication via PROFIBUS
To further process the PZD data internally, the PROFIBUS master must always send a 1 in
the eleventh bit (bit 10) of the first control word (control by PLC). It is not sufficient to
interconnect parameter p854 permanently with a 1.
This also applies to slave-to-slave communication between multiple slaves (drive with DC
master as an excitation device). The eleventh bit (bit 10) must be preset to 1 in the first control
word of the master on the drive. This also applies when no other master control commands
are in use and slaves are communicating by direct slave-to-slave data exchange only.
Start-up
7.1 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
114 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Operation 8
8.1 Safety instructions for operation
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
DANGER
Operation with the doors open
High voltages are present in the drive and its components during operation and also after it
has been switched off. When touched, these voltages can lead to death or severe injury.
● Ensure that no voltage is present when the doors of the power unit are open.
● Never operate the drive with doors open.
WARNING
Faults
Operating the converter when a fault has arisen can result in death, serious injury or
substantial material damage.
● Observe the fault and alarm messages.
● Eliminate the source of the fault. Only put the converter back into operation once this is
resolved. You can find further information on alarms and faults in the section "Indicating
and rectifying faults."
● If it is not possible to correct a fault, inform the manufacturer's service personnel
immediately. For additional information, see Chapter "Service & support".
WARNING
Unpermitted operation with ground fault
The type and location of the fault cannot be established just from a ground fault error
message. For example, the glow discharge at the winding overhang of the machine may
result in a fault signal. In the event of continued operation, serious aftereffects all the way to
electric arcs are possible. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
If a ground fault is experienced during drive operation, the drive must be switched off
immediately. Then identify and eliminate the source of the ground fault.
The plant operating company is responsible for the consequences, if the drive is still operated
after a ground fault has been detected. Carry out a risk analysis.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 115
WARNING
Exceeding the permitted short-circuit currents
Serious follow-on faults are possible, if the specified short-circuit current values are exceeded.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Observe the maximum permitted short-circuit currents and maximum specified short-circuit
times.
NOTICE
Incorrect parameterization
The drive may malfunction if you change the parameters.
Do not change the parameters, e.g. for the motor circuit-breaker.
Note
To complement these operating instructions, the List Manual contains an overview of all
parameters as well as a selection of function diagrams to describe the operating principle.
Only trained personnel should be allowed to operate the drive.
This section describes basic operating procedures performed via the AOP30 operator panel.
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
8.2.1 General information about the AOP30 operator panel
8.2.1.1 AOP30 operator panel
You can use the Advanced Operator Panel (AOP30) for operating, and diagnosing the drive.
The AOP30 communicates with the drive via a serial RS-232 interface with PPI protocol. The
interface is a point-to-point connection. The AOP30 has the master function in this
communication. The connected drive has the slave function.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
116 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Functions of the AOP30
Figure 8-1 AOP30 operator panel
The AOP30 has the following features and functions:
● Graphics-capable LCD with the following features
– Green backlighting for plain-text display
– Resolution of 240 x 64 pixels
– Quasi-analog bar-type display for process variables
● Keypad for operational control of a drive
● Numeric keypad for the numeric input of parameter values
● 4 LEDs for indicating the operating state of the drive unit:
– RUN: green
– ALARM: yellow
– FAULT: red
– LOCAL/REMOTE: green
● Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms
● Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus
● Realtime clock for the time stamping of faults and for setting up simple time controls
● LOCAL/REMOTE switchover for selecting the operating location
● Two-stage security concept to protect against unintentional or unauthorized changes to
settings.
● Time and date memory powered by internal battery backup
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 117
8.2.1.2 Buttons of the AOP30
Functions of the control keys
0(18
Calls the main menu of the AOP30.
Calls the "inhibit functions" menu.
Numeric keys for direct entry of values.
/2&$/
5(027(
Switches between remote and local mode. In local operation, the LED illu‐
minates.
On/off
If no operator inhibit is activated, then the "On" button in local operation is
always active. The "Off" button is only active in local operation, and in the
factory setting acts as "OFF1".
Counterclockwise-clockwise switchover
The button is only active in local mode.
-2*
JOG (Jogging)
The key is only in effect in local mode in "Ready to switch on" status (not
when "operating"). The system is accelerated to the setpoint speed.
Setpoint "increase" and setpoint "decrease".
You can enter the setpoint using these buttons. Alternatively, you can enter
the setpoint using the alphanumeric keys. Using the numeric keypad, any
speed ranging between the maximum and minimum speed can be entered.
))
Function keys.
These keys have different functions depending on the menu. The respec‐
tive function appears in plain text above the key.
See also
Control settings (Page 125)
Inhibit functions (Page 128)
8.2.1.3 Basic operation of the AOP 30
The menu structure
Operation of the AOP 30 is menu-driven.
To make it easier to find a menu, the following figure shows the menu structure.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
118 Operating Instructions 04/2017
The menu displays marked with * only appear if you set the "special access" access level.
More detailed information is available in the "Inhibit functions" section.
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
Figure 8-2 Menu structure of the AOP 30
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 119
The function keys
Press the appropriate function key ② for navigation, for inputs and to change values within
the menus. The associated assigned function is written in plain text ① above the
corresponding function key.
ႭႣ'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ2SHUVFUHHQW\SH6FUHHQW\SH6FUHHQYDOXHV+HOS%DFNႱႧ&KDQJHEDUVႱႧ581$/$50)$8/7F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
Figure 8-3 Function keys of the AOP 30
Changing parameters
Press the appropriate function key ②. The assigned function ① can vary from menu to menu.
For example, the <F5> function key is assigned the <OK> or <◀ ▶ change> functions.
1. Using the function keys ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ select the parameter that you want to change.
2. To change the selected parameter, activate the parameter according to the menu.
Press the <OK> function key.
Use either the numeric keypad or the function keys to modify the selected parameter.
<▲>,< ▼>, <◀>, <▶>.
3. You must confirm the change according to the menu.
Press the <OK> function key.
4. Press the <Back> function key to scroll back to the main menu. Press the <MENU> function
key to directly call the main menu.
Calling up parameter Help
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired parameter.
2. Press the <Help> function key.
3. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired Help topic.
4. Press the <OK> function key to call the selected Help topic.
5. Press the <Back> function key to exit the Help function.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
120 Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.2.2 Configuration of the AOP30 operator panel
8.2.2.1 Define operation screen
Depending on the type of drive, an operation screen with ten different display parameters is
the default.
9(&7252))9B'& 9,B,7 $HII$867 )B2)) +]3:,5.N:/7,7 7B/7 r&,',67 $HII,4,67 $HII8B2)) 9HII+HOSFKDQJH6HO3DU'LDJ
Figure 8-4 Example of the operation screen
You can customize the display of the operation screen. The following types of display are
available:
● Values
– 2 digital values
– 10 values
The order of the entries in this screen determines the order of the operating variables
(parameters) displayed in the operation screen.
● Bars
– 3 bars
● Mixed
– 8 values / 1 bar
– 4 values / 2 bars
Order of the display: First the parameters to be displayed digitally and then the
parameters to be displayed as bars.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 121
Defining the operation screen
1. Press the <Change> function key. The "Operation screen" menu opens.
ႱႧႭ'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ2SHUVFUHHQW\SH6FUHHQW\SH6FUHHQW\SH+HOS%DFNႱႧ&KDQJHYDOXHV%DUVႱႧ$FWLYH
2. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Screen 2" entry. Then press the <Change>
function key to change the "Active" setting.
3. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Screen 2 type" entry. Then press the
<Change> function key to select the desired display type.
4. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Screen 2 values" entry. Then press the
<Change> function key to activate the setting.
ႱႧႣ'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ2SHUVFUHHQW\SH6FUHHQW\SH+HOS%DFNႱႧ&KDQJH9DOXHV%DUVDNWLY6FUHHQW\SH6FUHHQYDOXHV
– The display changes to the menu for entering the parameters.
2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQ%DFN&KDQJHU3%6(73%3='HPSI9RUU,B,67,BLVW%HWUDJJOU$8667$XVVWHXHUJUDGJOU)B$86$QWUIB$XVJJODႭ
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
122 Operating Instructions 04/2017
5. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the first parameter. Then press the <Change>
function key to activate the setting. The display changes to the menu for selecting the
DriveObject (DO).
'HILQHRSHUDWLRQ+HOS&DQFHO2.U3%62//3%3='HPSI9RUU,B,67,BLVW%HWUDJJOU$8667$XVVWHXHUJUDGJOU)B$86$QWUIB$XVJJOD%,&2'2VHOHF&8*0%B,1)129(&72509Ⴍ
6. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired DO. Then press the <OK> key to
confirm the setting. The "Parameter selection" menu opens.
'HILQHRSHUDWLRQ+HOS%DFN2.&8B*06HOHFWLQJSDUDPHWHUV$OOSDUDPHWHUVU3%3='HPSI:RUGႭ
7. You have two parameter selection options:
– All parameters of the selected DO
Press the <▼> function key to select "All parameters". Then confirm the selection with
OK. A list of all parameters of the selected DO is displayed.
– Selection of plausible parameters (see "List of the signals for the operation screen"
below) of the selected DO.
Select a parameter from the list of the signals for the operation screen of the selected DO.
The selected parameters from this list are displayed in the operation screen with an
abbreviated name (e.g. NSOLL).
8. Select the desired parameter or enter the parameter from the numeric keypad.
9. Confirm the setting by pressing the <OK> function key. The "Please wait" message appears
briefly. Then the operation screen appears in the configuration you set.
9(&725$863%62// ,B,67 $HII$867 )B$86 +]3:,5.N:/7,7+HOS&KDQJH6HO3DU'LDJ
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 123
List of signals for the operation screen
Table 8-1 List of signals for the operation screen
Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling
(100% = ...)
DO: Vector MV
Factory setting (entry no.)
Speed setpoint upstream of RFG (1) r1114 NSETP 1/min p2000
Output frequency (2) r0024 F_OUT Hz Reference frequen‐
cy
Output smoothed (3) r0032 P_ACT kW r2004
DC-link voltage smoothed (4) r0026 UDC V p2001
Actual speed smoothed (5) r0021 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Actual absolute current smoothed (6) r0027 I_IST A p2002
Motor temperature (7) r0035 T_MOT °C Reference tempera‐
ture
Motor temperature (8) r0037 T_LT °C Reference tempera‐
ture
Actual torque smoothed (9) r0031 M_ACT Nm p2003
Drive output voltage smoothed (10) r0025 C_OUT V p2001
Speed setpoint smoothed r0020 NSETP 1/min p2000
Control factor smoothed r0028 % Reference control
factor
Field-producing current component r0029 A p2002
Torque-producing current component r0030 A p2002
Drive overload
Degree of thermal overload
r0036 % 100% = Shutdown
Speed setpoint motor encoder r0061 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Speed setpoint after filter r0062 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Actual speed smoothed r0063 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Control deviation r0064 1/min p2000
Slip frequency r0065 Hz Reference frequen‐
cy
Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequen‐
cy
Output voltage r0072 UACT V p2001
Control factor r0074 % Reference control
factor
Torque-generating actual current r0078 A p2002
Actual torque value r0080 Nm p2003
Fixed speed setpoint effective r1024 1/min p2000
Active motor potentiometer setpoint r1050 1/min p2000
Resulting speed setpoint r1119 1/min p2000
Speed controller output r1508 Nm p2003
I component of speed controller r1482 Nm p2003
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
124 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling
(100% = ...)
PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 1/min p2000
Torque utilization smooth r0033 MUTIL %
Motor temperature r0035 T_MOT °C
Torque utilization r0081 MUTIL %
Speed setpoint r1169 NSETP 1/min p2000
Speed setpoint sum r1170 NSETP 1/min p2000
DO: CU_GM
PROFIBUS setpoint 2050 PBSOL
DO: B_InfMV
Vdc smooth r0026 VDC V p2001
Power Module temperatures r0037 LT T °C
Line frequency r66 fLine Hz
PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 PBSOL
DO: TM31
PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 PBSOL
Analog inputs U/I r4052 AI_UI
Analog inputs % r4055 AI_% %
Scaling
Table 8-2 Scaling
Variable Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning
Reference speed 100% = p2000 p2000 = Maximum speed (p1082)
Reference voltage 100% = p2001 p2001 = 1000 V
Reference current 100% = p2002 p2002 = Current limit (p0640)
Reference torque 100% = p2003 p2003 = 2 x rated motor torque
Reference power 100% = r2004
Reference frequency
Reference control factor 100% = Maximum output voltage without
overload
Reference flux 100% = Rated motor flux
Reference temperature 100% = 100° C
8.2.2.2 Control settings
You can set the control keys of the AOP as desired.
1. Press the <MENU> key.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ function key to select the <Commissioning/service> entry.
3. Press the <OK>. function key and the ▼ function key to select the <AOP settings> entry.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 125
4. Press the ▼ function key to select the <Control settings> entry from this menu. The display
changes to the Control settings menu.
Ⴍ&RQWUROVHWWLQJV6DYH/2&$/PRGH2IILQ5(027(/2&$/5(027(DOVRGXULQJRSHU5HG2))NH\DFWVDV+HOS%DFNႱႧ&KDQJHDNWLYႱႧ1RႱႧ1RႱႧ1RႱႧ2))
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ function key to select the desired entry. Press the <Change> function key
to change the setting.
6. Press the <Back> function key to confirm the entries.
You can find the description and setting options for the individual menu items in the following.
Saving LOCAL mode
● Setting "Yes" (default setting):
The LOCAL operating status is saved when the power supply is switched off and restored
the next time power is switched on.
● Setting "No":
The REMOTE operating status is activated when the supply voltage is switched back on.
Off in remote
● Setting "Yes":
It is possible to switch off in remote mode by pressing the <OFF> key.
● Setting "No":
The <OFF> key has no effect in remote operation.
The <OFF> key is always active in LOCAL mode.
LOCAL/REMOTE also during operation
● Setting "Yes":
You can switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is switched on (i.e. motor
is running).
● Setting "No" (default setting):
Before the system switches to LOCAL, a check is carried out to determine whether the drive
is in the operational status. In this case, the system does not switch to LOCAL and outputs
the error message "Local mode during operation not possible". Before the system switches
to REMOTE, the drive is switched off and the setpoint is set to 0.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
126 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Red OFF key acts as
● OFF1 - Ramp-down on the deceleration ramp (p1121). OFF1 is the default setting.
● OFF2 - Immediate pulse block, motor coasts to a standstill.
● OFF3 - Ramp-down on the emergency stop ramp (p1135).
The OFF key is only effective in LOCAL mode.
Red OFF key also in REMOTE
● Setting "Yes":
It is possible to switch off in remote mode by pressing the <OFF> key.
● Setting "No":
The <OFF> key has no effect in REMOTE operation.
In LOCAL mode, the OFF key is always in effect.
Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
● Setting "Yes":
In LOCAL mode, left/right switching is possible using the key.
● Setting "No" (default setting):
The key does not act in LOCAL mode.
In REMOTE mode, the key is always in effect.
For safety reasons, the left/right key is inactive in the default setting. Pumps and fans may
normally be operated only in one rotational direction. In the "Operation" state in LOCAL mode,
the current rotational direction is indicated by an arrow next to the operating mode.
JOG key active (jogging)
● Setting "Yes":
In LOCAL mode, in the "Ready to switch on" state (not in "Operation" state), jogging mode
is possible using the <JOG> key. The speed set in parameter p1058 is approached.
● Setting "No":
The <JOG> key has no effect in LOCAL mode.
The <JOG> key never acts in REMOTE mode.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 127
Save AOP setpoint
● Setting "Yes":
In LOCAL mode, the and keys save the set setpoint. The set value is automatically
reset as the setpoint value after the power supply is switched off and on again.
During the switchover from REMOTE to LOCAL mode with the drive switched on (motor
running), the current actual value is set as the AOP setpoint and saved.
During the switchover from REMOTE to LOCAL mode with the drive switched off, the last
saved AOP setpoint is used.
● Setting "No":
In LOCAL mode, after switching the drive off and on, "0" is set as initial value for the AOP
setpoint. "0" is also set as initial value for the AOP setpoint after the power supply has been
switched off and on.
The current value is set as AOP setpoint when switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode
for activated drive and running motor.
AOP ramp-up time/AOP ramp-down time
The AOP ramp-up time setpoint and the AOP ramp-down time setpoint specify in which time
the <+> and <-> keys change the AOP setpoint.
The ramp-up time acts when the setpoint changes from smaller to larger, i.e positive or negative
values. The ramp-down time acts in the opposite direction.
The times set here act in addition to the ramp-up and ramp-down times set in the drive.
The default setting for the AOP ramp-up time is 20 seconds. The default setting for the AOP
ramp-down time is 30 seconds.
Recommendation: Set the ramp-up/ramp-down time just as for p1120/p1121. Adjusting the
AOP ramp-up/ramp-down time does not affect the setting of parameters p1120/p1121,
because this is an AOP-specific setting.
Definition of the ramp-up/ramp-down time:
Example: With the ramp-up time set at 50 s, the maximum setpoint is reached by pressing the
<+> key in 50 s.
8.2.2.3 Inhibit functions
For protection against improper setting of the parameters or accidental use of the control keys,
you can activate various inhibit functions.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
128 Operating Instructions 04/2017
The menu structure of the inhibit functions
6DIHW\ORFNV2SHUDWH/RFN3DUDPORFN$FFHVVOHYHO
Calling up the inhibit function menu
1. Press the key with the key symbol.
Ⴍ6DIHW\ORFNV3DUDPORFN$FFHVVOHYHO2SHUDWHORFN%DFNႱႧ&KDQJHQRWBDFWLYHႱႧQRWBDFWLYH6WDQGDUG+HOS&KDQJH&KDQJH
The various inhibit functions are described in the following.
Operator input inhibit
Parameters can only be changed by entering a password.
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Operator input inhibit" function.
2. Press the <Change> function key to select the "active" or "inactive" setting.
– "active"
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: "Note: Inhibit function active".
The <OFF> key acts. The <LOCAL/REMOTE>, <LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <UP> and
<DOWN> keys are inhibited.
The key symbol indicates the inhibit.
– "inactive"
No operator input restrictions.
3. Press the <Back> function key to save the setting.
Parameterization inhibit
Prevent unauthorized parameterization. This function is protected with a password.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 129
It is possible to control the drive.
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Parameterization inhibit" function.
2. Press the <Change> function key to select the "active" or "inactive" setting.
– "active"
A window appears on the display for entering and confirming a password. Enter an
identification number (up to 7 digits).
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: "Parameterization inhibit - no control command
acceptance".
The control keys are not disabled.
The key symbol indicates the inhibit.
If you have forgotten the password, switch off the parameterization inhibit as follows:
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Pull out the RS232 data cable.
3. Switch on the power supply. Press the key with the key symbol for 20 seconds. The key
symbol extinguishes. The operation is not restricted.
4. Press the <Back> function key to save the setting.
Access level
The scope of the displayed parameters conforms to the set access level.
The access level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed.
The higher the access level, the more functions that are available.
The following access levels are possible:
Access level Functions
1: Standard Sufficient for simple applications. The default setting is "1 standard".
2: Extended
3: Expert The structure of the function can be changed by interconnecting BICO parame‐
ters. Only experts should make this setting.
4: Special access This setting is only used for service purposes. A password is required upon acti‐
vation.
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the "Access level" function.
2. Press the <Change> function key to select the desired access level.
3. Press the <Back> function key to exit the menu.
Note
Changing the access levels
During the device commissioning, prior to a change of the access level, e.g. from access
level 2 to access level 3, select the status "0: ready)".
For further information, refer to the Commissioning / service device commissioning section.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
130 Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.2.3 Menu description and setting options
The individual menus of the AOPs with their setting options are described in the following.
To make things easier for you, the respective section of the menu structure is illustrated at the
beginning of each chapter.
8.2.3.1 Operation screen
The menu structure of the operation screen
0DLQPHQX2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQ+HOS6HO3DU&KDQJH'LDJ&XUUHQWIDXOWV&XUUHQWDODUPV2OGIDXOWV2OGDODUPV
Figure 8-5 Menu structure of the operation screens
The operation screen
The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the drive:
In the factory setting, the following values are displayed:
● Operation status of the drive
● Direction of motor rotation
● Time
● Ten parameters (numerical display)
9(&7252))9B'& 9,B,7 $HII$867 )B2)) +]3:,5.N:/7,7 7B/7 r&,',67 $HII,4,67 $HII8B2)) 9HII+HOSFKDQJH6HO3DU'LDJ
Operation screen
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 131
Calling up operation screens
There are three options for calling up the operation screens:
● Once the system has started, press the <F5> key.
● Wait for five minutes (do not press any buttons). The Operation screen is called up
automatically.
● In the main menu, select "Operation screen". Press the <Select> function key.
Note
When there is a fault, the fault screen is automatically displayed.
Further settings
You can adjust the shape of the display and the displayed values to your liking. You can find
more detailed information in the "Defining operation screens" section.
The other menus of the operation screen
The menus that you can call up from the operation screen using the function keys are described
below.
Function key Function
Sel. Par. Selects a parameter (value or bar) of the operation screen.
Help Call up of an explanatory help text for the selected display. This help text de‐
scribes, e.g. which parameter forms the basis for the display.
change Open the "Define operation screen" menu.
You can find more detailed information in the "Defining operation screens" sec‐
tion.
Diag. Opens the "Fault memory/alarm memory" menu.
In this menu, the queue of active faults and alarms is displayed. You can find
further information on alarms and faults in the "Alarms and faults" section.
You can select the following fault and alarm menus.
Current faults
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active faults.
1. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about correcting the fault.
2. Press the <Ack.> function key to acknowledge the fault.
Current alarms
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active alarms.
1. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about correcting the alarm.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
132 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Old faults
This menu displays the number and titles of the old faults. The top row shows the following
information.
● The total number of faults.
● The time when the fault occurred.
The faults are displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
1. Press the <Tools+> key. Select "older" or "newer" to fetch the fault messages arranged
chronologically.
2. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about correcting the fault.
Old alarms
This menu displays the number and titles of the old alarms. The top row shows the following
information:
● The total number of alarms.
● The time when the alarm occurred.
The alarms are displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
1. Press the <Tools+> key. Select "older" or "newer" to fetch the alarms arranged
chronologically.
2. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about correcting the alarm.
8.2.3.2 Parameterization
Parameterization menu structure
The menus that you can call from the "Parameterization" menu using the function keys are
described below.
3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ,QGLYLG'2$OO'23DUDPHWHUL]H'2VHOHFWLRQ3HUPDQHQWSDUDPHWHUWUDQVIHU0DLQPHQX
Figure 8-6 Parameterization menu structure
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 133
Calling up the parameterization menu
1. Press the "MENU" key.
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Parameterization" row. Press the <OK> function
key to confirm the selection.
3. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired function. Press the <OK> function
key to confirm the selection.
Individual DO
The "Individual DO" function opens the parameter lists for the individual DriveObjects (DO).
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired DO. Confirm the selection with
<OK>.
2. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired parameter. Alternatively, you can
select the parameter by entering the parameter number on the keypad. Parameters with
identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than one drive object
(e.g. p0005).
3. Press the <Change> function key to open the change window of the parameter. You can
change the parameter by assigning values or by making a selection from a list.
4. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about the selected parameter.
All DOs
The "All DOs" function displays a list of the parameters of all the DriveObjects (DO) sorted
numerically. In this list, the same parameter number can appear several times. At the top left,
you see the number of the DO to which the parameter belongs in brackets.
1. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired parameter. Alternatively, you can
select the parameter by entering the parameter number on the keypad. Parameters with
identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than one drive object
(e.g. p0005).
2. Press the <Change> function key to open the change window of the parameter. You can
change the parameter by assigning values or by making a selection from a list.
3. Press the <Help> function key to fetch information about the selected parameter.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
134 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Selecting data sets
ႣႭ2.+HOS%DFN'DWDVHWVHOHFWLRQ7\S&RPPDQG'6'ULYH'60RWRU'6FGP0D['ULYH$23
Figure 8-7 Selecting data sets
In this menu, you can parameterize the following data sets:
● Command data set
● Drive data set
● Motor data set
● Speed encoder data set
● Power unit data set
The data set number set for "AOP" specifies which index (data set) of the assigned parameter
in the AOP is displayed. This is independent of which data set is currently activated in the drive.
Example of a data set selection
You can set separately the main setpoints in the terminal mode and PROFIBUS mode using
two command data sets. This requires that you have parameterized this beforehand.
● In terminal mode p1070[1] 1), REMOTE MODE 1
● In PROFIBUS mode p1070[0] 1), REMOTE MODE 0
1) The command data set that must be enabled for setting the relevant main setpoint is indicated
in the square parentheses of the parameter [ ]. In the factory setting, command data set 0 is
active.
Permanent parameter acceptance
The parameters are saved on the CompactFlash card using this menu.
You can find further information on this in the "Permanently saving the parameters" section.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 135
8.2.3.3 Fault/alarm memory
Menu structure of the fault memory/alarm memory menu
0DLQPHQX)DXOWDODUPPHPRU\
Figure 8-8 Menu structure for fault memory/alarm memory
Alarm overview
If a fault occurs, the drive displays the associated faults and/or alarms on the operator panel
in the "Alarm overview".
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the fault occurred.
The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds (r0969).
The diagram below shows that currently at least one active fault/alarm is present for the
"VECTOR" drive object. The two other drive objects are fault-free.
ႣႭ
&8B*9(&72570)DXOW$ODUP
'LDJ7RROV$ODUPRYHUYLHZ
1. Press the <Diag.> function key to display the "Display diagnostics" menu. In this menu the
current and old faults and alarms are displayed.
ႣႭ
&XUUHQWDODUPV2OGDODUPV2OGIDXOWV2OGIDXOWV
2.%DFN^9(&725`'LVSOD\GLDJQRVWLFV
You can find further information on alarms and faults in the "Operation screens" section.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
136 Operating Instructions 04/2017
What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or an other exceptional (unwanted)
status. The cause can be a drive-internal fault or an external fault. The fault, for example, could
have been issued by the winding temperature monitoring of the asynchronous motor. The
faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In
the factory default setting, the message "drive fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you
have eliminated the cause of the fault, acknowledge the fault message.
The list of faults and alarms indicates the type of response (e.g. OFF1, OFF2) for each fault
message.
Displaying faults
Faults are displayed by the red "FAULT" LED. Any faults that have occurred are automatically
displayed. Up to eight faults occurring at the same time are displayed.
1. Use the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the fault.
2. Press the <Ack.> function key to acknowledge the fault. The operation screen is displayed.
3. Press the <Help> function key to fetch the information for clearing the fault.
)9(&725)DXOWV+HOS%DFN4XLWWႭ+DXSWQHW]VFKDOWHUB)(UGVFKOXVV6W¸UXQJ
What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive that does not result in the
drive being shutdown. Alarms do not need to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 137
Displaying alarms
Alarms are displayed by the yellow "ALARM" LED. Additionally, an appropriate note relating
to the cause is displayed on the operator panel. Up to eight alarms occurring at the same time
are displayed.
+9(&725)DXOWV+HOS%DFN&OHDU(UGVFKOXVVZDUQXQJDFWLY
Figure 8-9 Alarm screen
8.2.3.4 Commissioning / service device commissioning
Commissioning / service / device commissioning menu structure
&RPPLVVLRQLQJVHUYLFH'HYLFHFRPPLVVLRQLQJ0DLQPHQX5HDG\'HYLFHFRQILJXUDWLRQ'HILQLWLRQRIGULYHW\SH'ULYHEDVHFRQILJXUDWLRQ'DWDVHWEDVHFRQILJXUDWLRQ3DUDPHWHUUHVHW
Figure 8-10 Commissioning / service / device commissioning menu structure
1. Press the <<MENU>> key.
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Commissioning/Service" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
3. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Device commissioning" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
– The menus marked with "*" appear only when the "special access" access level was
selected
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
138 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Device commissioning menu
This expert menu supports the device commissioning controlled via p0009.
1. Select a commissioning level.
– The parameters that can be written in the enabled commissioning level are displayed.
This makes it easier for you to make changes, such as switching over units or activating
function modules.
2. Set the p0009 parameter to 0: Ready to finish commissioning.
Ⴍ+HOS%DFN2.'HYLFHFRPPLVVLRQLQJS 'DWDVHWEDVHFRQILJXUDWL5HDG\'HYLFHFRQILJXUDWLRQ'HILQLWLRQRIGULYHW\SH'ULYHEDVHFRQILJXUDWLRQ
3. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired parameter. Confirm the selection
with <OK>.
●0: Ready = The device commissioning is closed.
●1: Device configuration = At the first commissioning of the device, after start-up, the device
is in the "device configuration" status. Transfer the identification for the actual topology
(r0098) to the identification for the setpoint topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to
set a single index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. No other parameter may be
changed prior to the commissioning. To start the internal automatic first device
commissioning, set p0009 = 0 (ready). After the first commissioning has been carried out,
in this status, other basic device configuration parameters can be adjusted (e.g. the basic
sampling time in p0110) if required.
●2: Specification of the drive type = You can change or select the drive object types and/or
the function modules for individual drive objects. To do this, set the drive object type with
p0107[0...15] and the function module with p0108[0...15]. Further details can be found in
the parameter p0101[0...15].
●3: Drive basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first time,
basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling times in p0111,
p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140, p0170, p0180).
●4: Data basis configuration = After the first commissioning of the device, you can change
the individual drive objects:
– Assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual
data sets.
– Assignment of the power unit, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, ...).
●30: parameter reset = In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" status
or to load the parameters saved with p0977, p0009 must first be set to this value. p0976
can then be changed to the required value.
You will find a list of the settable parameters below.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 139
Overview of the important parameters (list manual)
Table 8-3 Overview of important parameters (equipment commissioning)
Parameter Parameter text
Device configuration
p0092 Synchronous PROFIBUS operation, pre-assignment/check
p0097 Select drive object type
r0098[0] Device actual topology, DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
p0099[0] Device setpoint topology, DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
p0101[0] Drive object numbers, drive object number Control Unit
p0978[0] List of drive objects
p2042 PROFIBUS ID number
p9904 Topology comparison, acknowledge differences
p9905 Device specialization
p9906 Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components
p9907 Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number
p9908 Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component
p9909 Topology comparison, component replacement
p9910 Taking on additional components in the setpoint topology
p9915 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, master
p9916 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, slave
Definition of drive type
DO CU_GM
P0103[0] Application-specific view
p0107[0] Drive objects type, drive object Control Unit
p0108[0] Drive objects function module, function module Control Unit
Drive data basic configuration
DO VECTORMV
p0112 Sampling time pre-setting p0115
p0115[0] Sampling times for internal control loops, current controller
r0116[0] Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object
p0120 Number of Power Module data sets (PDS)
p0130 Number of Motor data sets (MDS)
p0140 Number of Encoder data sets (EDS)
p0170 Number of Command data sets (CDS)
p0180 Number of Drive data sets (DDS)
r6672[0] Switch switch-on time measured, switch 0
r6673[0] Switch switch-off time measured, switch 0
p6674[0] Switch switch-on monitoring time, switch 0
p6675[0] Switch switch-off monitoring time, switch 0
p6681[0] Switch On/Off commands pulse time, switch 0
p6683[0] Switch bounce time, switch 0
DO B_Inf
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
140 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Parameter Parameter text
p0112 Sampling time pre-setting p0115
p0115[0] Sampling times for internal control loops, current controller
p0120 Number of Power Module data sets (PDS)
p0170 Number of Command data sets (CDS)
r6672[0] Switch switch-on time measured, switch 0
r6673[0] Switch switch-off time measured, switch 0
p6674[0] Switch switch-on monitoring time, switch 0
p6675[0] Switch switch-off monitoring time, switch 0
p6681[0] Switch On/Off commands pulse time, switch 0
p6683[0] Switch bounce time, switch 0
DO CU-GM
p0115[0] Sampling times for additional functions, basic sampling time
r0116[0] Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object
p0799 CU inputs/outputs, sampling time
TM15DI_DO
P4099 TM15 DI/DO inputs/outputs, sampling time
Data basic configuration
DO CU_GM
r0197 Loader 1 version
r0198 Loader 2 version
DO VECTORMV
p0121[0] Power module component number
r0126[0] Power unit components active/inactive
p0131[0] Motor component number
p0141[0] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number
p0142[0] Encoder component number
p0145[0] Enable/disable encoder interface
p0146[0] Encoder interface active/inactive
p0186[0] Motor data set (MDS) number
p0187[0] Encoder 1 encoder data set number
p0188[0] Encoder 2 encoder data set number
p0189[0] Encoder 3 encoder data set number
TM15DI_DO
p0151 Terminal Module component number
Note
Changing the access levels
During the device commissioning, prior to a change of the access level, e.g. from access level
2 to access level 3, select the status "0: ready)".
For further information, refer to the Commissioning / service device commissioning section.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 141
8.2.3.5 Commissioning / service drive commissioning
Commissioning / service / drive commissioning menu structure
&RPPLVVLRQLQJVHUYLFH'ULYHFRPPLVVLRQLQJ%DVLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJ&RPSOHWHFRPPLVVLRQLQJ0RWRULGHQWLILFDWLRQ5HVHWIDQRSHUDWLQJWLPH0DLQPHQX
Figure 8-11 Commissioning / service / drive commissioning menu structure
1. Press the <Menu>. key
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Commissioning/Service" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
3. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Device commissioning" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
4. Press the <▼> function key to select the desired menu item.
Basic commissioning
In this menu, you can set the following parameters for the basic parameterization:
Table 8-4 Drive Object VectorMV
Parameter Parameter text
p700[0] Macro binector input (BI)
p1000[0] Macro connector inputs (CI) for speed setpoints
p1070[0] CI: Main setpoint
p1080[0] Minimum speed
p1082[0] Maximum speed
p1120[0] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time
p1121[0] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time
p1135[0] OFF3 ramp-down time
Complete commissioning
In this menu, all of the parameters of the basic parameterization except for the parameters of
the DO B_Infeed can be set.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
142 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Motor identification
This function has not yet been implemented and will be made available at a later point in time.
Resetting the fan runtime
In this menu, you can reset the fan counter. The fan counter must be reset after a fan
replacement.
1. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Reset runtime" row.
2. Confirm the selection with <OK>. The reset of the fan runtime also clears alarm A30042.
+HOS%DFN2.9(&725BIDQRSHUDWLQJWLPHIDQRSHUDWLQJWLPH+RXUV5HVHWIDQRSHUDWLQJWLPH
8.2.3.6 Commissioning / Service - AOP settings
Commissioning /Service / AOP settings menu structure
&RQWUROVHWWLQJV'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ6HWGDWHWLPH5HVHW$23VHWWLQJV'LVSOD\VHWWLQJV$GYDQFHGVHWWLQJV,&RPPLVVLRQLQJVHUYLFH$23VHWWLQJV0DLQPHQX
Figure 8-12 Commissioning /Service / AOP settings menu structure
Calling up AOP settings
1. Press the <<MENU>> key.
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Commissioning/Service" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
3. Press the <▼> function key to select the "AOP settings" row. Press the <OK> function key
to confirm the selection.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ function key to select the desired setting. Press the <OK> function key to
confirm the selection.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 143
* The "Extended settings" menu appears only when the "special access" access level is
selected.
Control settings
In this menu, set the functions that the AOP control keys should perform. For example, you
can specify whether the <OFF> key is associated with the OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3 function.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Control settings".
Display settings
Make the following AOP settings in this menu:
● Illumination (on, off after 2 minutes, off)
● Intensity of illumination
● Contrast
ႱႧႭ'LVSOD\VHWWLQJV/LJKWLQJLQWHQVLW\&RQWUDVW/LJKWLQJ%DFNႱႧ&KDQJHႱႧ21ႱႧ
1. Select the desired setting using the <▼> function key.
2. Change the setting using the <Change> function key.
3. Confirm the setting using the <Back> function key.
Defining the operation screen
In this menu, you can define which parameters the operation screen should display.
A DriveObject (DO) selection is offered on each display. The corresponding parameter list is
offered for each DO. You can select and assign all parameters (r and p). In addition, a selection
of plausible displayable parameters is displayed for each DO.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Defining operating screens".
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
144 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Setting the date/time
In this menu, you can set the date and time.
6HWGDWHWLPH7LPH66PPVV6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ'DWHWWPPMMMM&DQFHOႱႧ1RQHVDYHႱ&Ⴇ
1. Select the desired setting using the <▼> function key.
2. Change the setting using the numeric keys. You can delete incorrect entries using the <◀
C> function key.
3. Select the "synchronization" row. Make the desired setting.
– "None"
The AOP time is managed internally and is displayed in the upper right of the operating
screen.
– "AOP➙DRIVE"
The AOP time is recorded in the drive each time the AOP is powered up, and daily at
2:00 AM. If a valid synchronization is detected, the time stamp for faults and alarms is
displayed on the AOP in real time.
– "DRIVE ➙AOP"
This operating state requires that the drive be connected to and synchronized by a
master clock. Every time the AOP is powered up, and daily at 2:00 AM, the time of the
drive is adopted as the time of the AOP. If a valid synchronization is detected, the time
stamp for faults and alarms is displayed on the AOP in real time.
4. Select "Save". Confirm the setting with <OK>.
Extended settings
In this menu, you can make the following extended settings:
● Load the AOP settings from the CU
● Automatically acknowledge topology
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 145
● Mixed operation of servo/vector
● Database mode for the test bay
ႱႧႭ$GYDQFHGVHWWLQJV$XWRPDFNQRZOHGJHWRSRORJ\&RPELQHGRSHURI6(5929(&725'RZQORDG$23VHWWLQJVIURP&8%DFNႱႧ&KDQJH<HVႱႧ<HVႱႧ1R'DWDEDVHPRGHIRUWKHWHVWILHOGႱႧ1R
1. Select the desired setting using the ▼ function key.
2. Change the setting using the <Change> function key.
3. Confirm the setting using the <Back> function key.
Load the AOP settings from the CU
Each time the power supply of the AOP is switched on, the AOP settings are read by the drive.
This makes it possible to swap AOPs without losing the settings.
If you set the selection to "No" in the "Load AOP settings from CU" row, you can transfer the
settings from one drive to the other one.
Automatically acknowledge topology
If the AOP is connected to a drive that has not yet saved a setpoint topology (p99=r98), the
topology is automatically acknowledged by the AOP. If the selection is set to "No" in the
"Automatically acknowledge the topology" row, the automatic acknowledgement of the
topology is disabled.
Mixed operation of servo/vector
This function is not supported.
Database mode for the test bay
If the AOP is connected to a drive unit with a changed topology or changed software version,
the database is deleted and rebuilt. For the special device test application, you can activate
the "Database mode for the test bay" function. This activation can be used, for example, to
redefine a Motor Module as an Active Line Module during the test. The automatic deletion of
the database is disabled.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
146 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Resetting the AOP settings
In this menu, you reset the following settings to their default setting:
● Language
● Display settings
● Operation screen
● Control settings
Ⴍ2.$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQU¾FNVHW]HQ'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XU¾FNVHW]HQ5HVHW$23VHWWLQJV<HV1R
1. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Yes" or "No" setting.
– "Yes:
All settings that are different from the factory settings are reset immediately. The setting
may cause the drive to switch to an unwanted operational states.
– "No":
The values are not reset
2. Confirm the setting with <OK>.
The settings become active immediately.
8.2.3.7 Commissioning / Service - AOP diagnostics
Commissioning / Service / AOP diagnostics menu structure
&RPPLVVLRQLQJVHUYLFH$23GLDJQRVWLFV0DLQPHQX6RIWZDUHGDWDEDVHYHUVLRQ%DWWHU\VWDWXV.H\ERDUGWHVW/('WHVW&RPPXQLFDWLRQ)RUPDWIODVK)6&OHDUSHUVLVWHQWGDWDEDVH
Figure 8-13 Commissioning / Service / AOP diagnostics menu structure
1. Press the <<MENU>> key.
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Commissioning/Service" row. Press the <OK>
function key to confirm the selection.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 147
3. Press the <▼> function key to select the "AOP diagnostics" row. Press the <OK> function
key to confirm the selection.
4. Press the <▲> or <▼> function key to select the desired setting. Press the <OK> function
key to confirm the selection.
* These menus appear only if the "Special access" access level was selected
Software/database version
Ⴍ6RIWZDUHGDWDEDVHYHUVLRQ0/)%1R6HULDOQXPEHU)LUPZDUH'DWHWLPH%DFN7'6/$$&$
The following values are displayed:
● Serial number
● MLFB number
● Firmware
● Date/time
● Database
Battery status
This menu shows the charging state of the AOP battery. The battery ensures that the data in
the database and the current time are retained. A battery voltage ≥ 3 V corresponds to 100%
of the battery voltage. A battery voltage ≤ 2 V corresponds to the value 0%. The data is secure
up to a battery voltage of 2 V. Depending on the battery voltage, the following messages are
issued:
● Battery voltage ≤ 2.45 V: "Replace battery".
● Battery voltage ≤ 2.30 V: "Alarm, weak battery".
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
148 Operating Instructions 04/2017
● Battery voltage ≤ 2.00 V: "Important: The battery is dead".
● If the drive is not activated for a long period of time, the time and status of the database
might not be displayed. The missing information is caused by insufficient voltage of the
battery. In this case, messages appear that prompt you to replace the battery, load the
database and set the time. Information on replacing the battery can be found in the
operating instructions of the drive in the "Maintenance and Servicing" section.
%DFN%DWWHU\VWDWXV%DWWHU\YROWDJH9
Communication
The "Communication" menu represents the status of the communication between AOP30 and
CU. The following items are displayed:
● Number of fault-free message frames
● Number of faulty message frames
● Number of character frame faults
● Number of overflow errors
● Number of start limiter errors
● Number of end limiter errors
● Number of character length errors
● Number of frame test mark errors
● Number of frame test mark errors
● Number of frame transfer errors
● Number of layer 2 message frame failures
● PPI status
● Number of layer 7 message frame failures
● Number of message frame repetitions (SD2)
Ⴍ%DFN&RPPXQLFDWLRQ3DULW\HUURU(UURUIUHHWHOHJUDPV7HOHJUDPHUURU&KDUDFWHUIUDPHHUURU6WDUWGHOLPLWHUHUURU2YHUIORZHUURU
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 149
Keyboard test
Use this menu to test the function of each individual key of the AOP. Keys that you press are
represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press the keys in any order you
wish. If each key has been pressed at least once, you can exit the menu by pressing the <Back>
key.
You can also exit the "Keyboard test" menu by pressing and holding any key.
LED test
Use this menu to test the function of the AOP LEDs.
Flash FS formatting
The drive reads the ACX files to describe the parameters and alarms. The ACX files are
buffered in the Flash File System. The data is deleted after being parsed.
To rule out the risk of files being retained, the Flash File System can be manually deleted via
this menu item.
Note
The Flash memory is formatted, without further confirmation, after pressing the <OK> function
key.
Note
The CompactFlash card is not formatted.
Delete persistent database
The database with all parameter and alarm descriptions of the found topology is stored in the
battery-buffered RAM. The database is available immediately after a power off and on of the
supply voltage.
The "Delete persistent database" menu item deletes the database manually. The database
will be rebuilt during the next power up.
Note
The database is deleted immediately, without further confirmation, after pressing the <OK>
function key.
Operation
8.2 Operation via the AOP30 operator panel
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
150 Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.2.3.8 Language
Language menu structure
/DQJXDJH0DLQPHQX
Figure 8-14 Language menu structure
Selecting a language
1. Press the <MENU> key.
2. Press the <▼> function key to select the "Language" row. Press the <OK> function key to
confirm the selection.
3. Press the <▼> function key to select the desired language.
4. Confirm with the <OK> function key.
8.3 Parameter
Note
To complement these operating instructions, the List Manual contains an overview of all
parameters as well as a selection of function diagrams to describe the operating principle.
8.3.1 Parameters
The drive is adapted to the relevant drive task by means of parameters. Each parameter is
identified by a unique parameter number and specific attributes. Such attributes are, for
example:
● Readable attributes
● Writable attributes
● BICO attributes
The parameters can be accessed via the following means:
● PC with commissioning tool via PROFIBUS
● Operator panel
Operation
8.3 Parameter
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 151
8.3.2 Parameter types
Parameter types
The following parameters are available:
● Adjustable parameters (write/read)
Adjustable parameters directly influence the response of a function, e.g. the ramp-up and
ramp-down time of a ramp-function generator.
● Visualization parameters (read-only)
Display parameters are used to display internal variables, e.g. the actual motor current.
3DUDPHWHUUHDGUUHDGZULWHS%,&2RXWSXW1RUPDOUHDGSDUDPHWHUV%,&2LQSXW1RUPDOUHDGZULWHSDUDPHWHUV
Figure 8-15 Parameter types
All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms
defined in the PROFIdrive profile.
Parameter categories
The parameters for the individual drive objects (DO) are categorized according to data sets
as follows:
● Data-set-independent parameters
These parameters exist only once per drive object.
● Data-set-dependent parameters
These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and are addressed via the
parameter index for reading and writing. The following data set types can be distinguished:
– CDS: Command data set
By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them, the drive
can be operated with different preconfigured signal sources.
– DDS: Drive data set
The drive data set contains the parameters required for switching the drive control
parameters.
The CDS and DDS data sets can be switched during operation. Further data set types
also exist, however these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS
changeover.
– EDS: Encoder data set
– MDS: Motor data set
Operation
8.3 Parameter
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
152 Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.4 Functions
8.4.1 Setpoint channel and closed-loop control
8.4.1.1 Setpoint channel
Setpoint addition
Fine tuning (correction variable) often needs to be carried out on site for applications in which
the command variables are generated by central control systems.
You achieve the correction variable using the addition point for the main and additional setpoint
in the setpoint channel. Both variables are imported simultaneously via two separate or one
setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel.
Adjustable parameters
Parameter Setting
p1070 Main setpoint
p1071 Main setpoint scaling
r1073 Main setpoint effective
p1075 Supplementary setpoint
p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling
r1077 Supplementary setpoint effective
r1078 Total setpoint effective
These parameters concern connector inputs to which the setpoint values are connected.
Function diagram
FP 3030
Direction reversal
A reversal of the rotational direction is necessary under the following conditions:
● When the drive should be operated in both directions of rotation.
● If the cables were connected with an incorrect phase sequence.
Note
Note that only one direction of rotation is enabled in the factory setting.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 153
To subsequently reverse the phase sequence, you must interchange the motor cables or enter
a negative setpoint. A direction reversal cannot be achieved with parameter settings. Direction
of rotation changeover is initiated as follows:
● Controlled via PROFIBUS using control word 1, bit 11
● Controlled from the cabinet operator panel ("LOCAL mode" function) with the "direction of
rotation changeover" key.
Table 8-5 Parameter
Parameter Setting
p1110 Inhibit negative direction
p1111 Inhibit positive direction
p1113 Direction of rotation reversal
For further information, see the function diagram 3040.
Skip frequency bands and minimum speed
Variable-speed drives can generate critical whirling speeds within the control range of the
entire drive train. This prevents steady-state operation in their proximity, that is,
the range of critical whirling speeds can still be passed through. The drive, however, must not
remain here because this can cause excitation of the sympathetic oscillations.
The suppression bandwidths allow this range to be blocked for steady-state operation.
Because the points at which critical whirling speeds occur in a drive train can vary depending
on age or thermal factors, a broader control range should be blocked. To ensure that the speed
does not constantly increase and decrease in the suppression bandwidth (speeds), the bands
are assigned a hysteresis.
Specify a minimum speed in order to block a specific range around the stopped state for
stationary operation.
Table 8-6 Parameter
Parameter Setting
p1091 Suppression speed 1
p1092 Suppression speed 2
p1093 Suppression speed 3
p1094 Suppression speed 4
p1101 Suppression speed bandwidth
p1080 Minimum speed
r1112 Speed setpoint after minimum limiting
You can find additional information in function diagrams 1550 and 3050.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
154 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Speed limitation
The speed limitation is used to limit the maximum permitted speed for the complete drive train.
The drive and the load machine / process are protected from damage caused by overspeed.
Table 8-7 Parameter
Parameter Setting
p1082 Maximum speed, both directions of rotation
p1083 Speed limit in positive direction of rotation
p1086 Speed limit in negative direction of rotation
You can find additional information in function diagrams 1550 and 3050.
Ramp-function generator
The ramp-function generator limits the rate at which the setpoint changes when the drive is
accelerating or decelerating. This prevents excessive setpoint step changes from damaging
the drive train. Parameter p1115 can be used to select two ramp-function generators.
To improve the control properties with regard to load surges, set additional rounding times in
the lower and upper speed range.
The rounding times achieve the following:
● They protect mechanical components, such as shafts and couplings.
● The overshoot of the actual speed while approaching the setpoint is avoided. The control
quality is improved.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times each refer to the maximum speed (p1082).
Note
If rounding times are too long, this can cause the setpoint to be overshot if the setpoint is
reduced abruptly during ramp-up.
Rounding is also effective in the zero crossover;
When the rotational direction is reversed, the ramp-function generator output is reduced to
zero using the following parameters:
● The initial rounding
● The ramp-down time
● The final rounding
The new inverted setpoint is approached using the following parameters:
● The initial rounding
● The ramp-up time
● The final rounding
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 155
Rounding times that can be set separately are active in the event of a fast stop (OFF3). The
actual ramp-up/ramp-down times increase with active rounding.
Table 8-8 Parameter
Parameter Setting
P1115 Selection between simple ramp-function generator and extended ramp-function
generator
p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time
p1121 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time
p1130 Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time
p1131 Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time
p1135 OFF3 ramp-down time
p1136 OFF3 initial rounding-off time
p1137 OFF3 final rounding-off time
Note
The effective ramp-up time increases when you enter an initial and final rounding-off time.
Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + (0.5 x p1130) + (0.5 x p1131)
You can find additional information in function diagrams 3060 and 3070.
8.4.1.2 Vector control
Properties of vector control
Vector control has the following properties and features:
● Stability during load and setpoint changes.
● Improved control characteristic thanks to short rise times for setpoint changes.
● Improved disturbance characteristic thanks to short settling times for load changes.
● Acceleration and braking are possible with maximum available torque.
● Motor protection due to variable torque limitation in motor and regenerative mode.
● Drive and braking torque controlled independently of the speed.
These benefits can even be achieved without speed feedback.
Note
Vector control can be used with or without an encoder.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
156 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Benefits of vector control with an encoder
A speed encoder is only required in the following conditions:
● A separately excited motor is used.
● Highest speed accuracy is required.
● The most stringent demands on the dynamic response are required.
● Better command behavior is desired.
● The shortest possible settling times during disturbances are required.
● Torque control in a range greater than 1:10 is required.
● A defined and/or variable torque for speeds below approx. 5% of the rated motor frequency
(p0310) must be maintained.
Open-loop and closed-loop control methods (p1300):
● V/f control with linear characteristic.
● I/f control with fixed current.
● Speed control.
● Torque/current control (in short: torque control).
Vector control with encoder
Benefits of vector control with an encoder:
● The speed can be controlled right down to 0 Hz (standstill).
● Stable control response throughout the entire speed range.
● Allows a defined and/or variable torque for speeds below approx. 10% of the rated motor
speed to be maintained.
● In comparison with speed control without an encoder, the dynamic response of drives with
an encoder is significantly increased. The reason is that the speed is measured directly
and used for the model formation of the current components.
Function diagrams
● 1590
● 1610
● 6010
● 6030
● 6040
● 6050
● 6060
● 6490
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 157
Vector control without an encoder
Vector control without an encoder is used with induction motors.
In vector control without an encoder, the position of the flux and actual speed must be
determined via the electric motor model. The model is buffered by the incoming currents and
voltages. At low frequencies (approx. 0 Hz), the model cannot determine the speed.
For this reason and due to uncertainties in the model parameters or inaccurate measurements,
the system is switched from closed-loop to open-loop operation in this range.
The switchover is governed by time and frequency conditions (p1755, p1756, and p1758). If
the setpoint frequency at the ramp-function generator input and the actual frequency are below
p1755 x p1756 simultaneously, the system does not wait for the time condition.
,IBDFW,WS>PLQ@S>PLQ@SSW2SHQFRQWUROORRS&ORVHGFRQWURO
Figure 8-16 Switchover conditions
In open-loop operation, the actual speed value is the same as the setpoint value.
To provide the resulting static or dynamic load torque for suspended loads or acceleration
tasks, modify the following parameters:
● p1610 (constant torque increase)
If p1610 is set to 0%, only the magnetizing current r0331 is impressed. For a value of 100%,
the rated motor current p0305 is impressed.
● p1611 (torque increase)
To ensure that the drive does not stall during acceleration, p1611 can be increased or
acceleration pre-control for the speed controller used. The p1611 increase is also advisable
to ensure that the motor is not subject to thermal overload at low speeds.
Vector control without encoder has the following features in the low frequency range:
● Closed-loop operation up to approx. 1 Hz output frequency
● Start-up in closed-loop operation (directly after drive is energized)
● Passes through low frequency range (0 Hz) in closed-loop operation
Note
In this case, the speed setpoint upstream of the ramp-function generator must be greater
than p1755.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
158 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Closed-loop operation above approx. 1 Hz (p1755) and the ability to start or reverse at 0 Hz
directly in closed-loop operation (p1750) produce the following benefits:
● No switching action within the closed-loop control necessary. This means smooth behavior,
no frequency drops.
● Stationary speed–torque control up to approx. 1 Hz.
Note
For controlled reversing or controlled starting for 0 Hz, under the following condition the
closed-loop control is switched automatically from closed-loop controlled operation to open-
loop controlled operation:
● Dwell-time > 2 seconds or > p1758 in the range of 0 Hz
8.4.1.3 U/f control
As an alternative to vector control, a U/f control is available for induction motors. This technique
is only appropriate when there are no highly dynamic requirements, e.g. pumps and fan drives.
V/f control aims to maintain a constant flux Φ in the motor whereby the flux (Φ) is proportional
to the magnetization current (Iµ) and the ratio of voltage (V) to frequency (f).
Φ ~ Iµ ~ V/f
The torque (M) generated by the induction motors is, in turn, proportional to the vector product
(Φ x I) of the flux and current. The V/f characteristic is derived from these basic premises:
To generate as much torque as possible with a given current, the motor must function using
the greatest possible constant flux. To maintain a constant flux (Φ), therefore, the voltage must
be changed in proportion to the frequency f. The voltage change ensures that a constant
magnetization current Iµ flows.
I803˓0Q˓QIQIPD[0˓8383
3RLQWRIPRWRU)LHOGUDQJH9ROWDJHUDQJH
Figure 8-17 Operating areas and characteristic curves for the induction motor with drive supply
Adjustable parameters
Parameter Setting
p1300 Open-loop/closed-loop operating mode / control type
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 159
Function diagrams
● 1590
● 1690
● 5060
● 6300
Note
A simple rise in voltage can be achieved with parameter p6890. Refer to function diagram
6300.
8.4.2 Analog and digital inputs/outputs
8.4.2.1 Analog outputs
The customer terminal block is equipped with two analog outputs for outputting setpoints via
current or voltage signals.
Factory setting:
● AO0: Actual speed value 0
● AO1: Actual motor current value 0
Adjustable parameters
● p4071 Analog outputs, signal source
● p4073 Analog outputs, smoothing time constant
● r4074 Analog outputs, actual output voltage/current
● p4076 Analog outputs, type
● p4077 Analog outputs, characteristic value x1
● p4078 Analog outputs, characteristic value y1
● p4079 Analog outputs, characteristic value x2
● p4080 Analog outputs, characteristic value y2
Function diagrams
● 1840
● 9572
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
160 Operating Instructions 04/2017
List of signals for the analog outputs
Signal Parameter Unit Scaling
(100% = ...)
Speed setpoint for setpoint filter r0060 1/min p2000
Motor speed unsmoothed r0061 1/min p2000
Actual speed smoothed r0063 1/min p2000
Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference fre‐
quency
Output current r0068 Aeff p2002
DC-link voltage r0070 V p2001
Torque setpoint r0079 Nm p2003
Output power r0082 kW r2004
For diagnostic purposes
Control deviation r0064 1/min p2000
Slip frequency r0065 Hz Reference fre‐
quency
Phase current actual value r0069 A p2002
Control factor r0074 % Reference control
factor
Field-generating current setpoint r0075 A p2002
Field-generating actual current r0076 A p2002
Torque-generating current setpoint r0077 A p2002
Torque-generating actual current r0078 A p2002
Flux setpoint r0083 % Reference flux
Actual flux r0084 % Reference flux
DC-link voltage r0088 V p2001
Phase voltage r0089 V p2001
For further diagnostic purposes
Speed controller output r1480 Nm p2003
I component of speed controller r1482 Nm p2003
Scaling
Variable Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning
Reference speed 100% = p2000 p2000 = Maximum speed (p1082)
Reference voltage 100% = p2001 p2001 = 1000 V
Reference current 100% = p2002 p2002 = Current limit (p0640)
Reference torque 100% = p2003 p2003 = 2 x rated motor torque
Reference power 100% = r2004 r2004 = (p2003 x p2000 x pi) / 30
Reference frequency 100 % = r2000 / 60
Reference control factor 100% = Maximum output voltage
without overload
Reference flux 100% = Rated motor flux
Reference temperature 100% = 100° C
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 161
Example: Changing analog output 0 from current to voltage output –/+ 10 V
9ROWDJHRXWSXWSUHVHQWDWWHUPLQDOJURXQGLVDWWHUPLQDO6HWDQDORJRXWSXWW\SHWR99
;S
Figure 8-18 Example: Setting analog output 0
Example: Changing analog output 0 from current to voltage output – / +10 V and setting the characteristic
;
Voltage output present at terminal 1, ground is at terminal 2
S>@
Set TM31.AO_type [analog output 0] to between -10 and +10 V.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. x1 to 0.00%.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char.
1 to 0.000 V.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. x2 to 100%.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. y2 to 10.000 V.
Factory setting
Digital output Terminal Factory setting
DO0 X542: 2,3 "Pulses enabled"
DO1 X542: 5,6 "No fault"
DI/DO8 X541: 2 "Ready for switching on"
DI/DO9 X541: 3
DI/DO10 X541: 4
DI/DO11 X541: 5
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
162 Operating Instructions 04/2017
8.4.2.2 Digital outputs
The drive is equipped with four bidirectional digital outputs (terminal X541) and two relay
outputs (terminal X542). These outputs are, for the most part, freely parameterizable. For
details, please refer to the circuit manual of the drive.
List of signals for the digital outputs
Signal Bit in status word 1 Parameter
1 = Ready to switch on 0 r0889.0
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked) 1 r0889.1
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) 2 r0889.2
1 = Fault present 3 r2139.3
0 = Coast to stop active (OFF2) 4 r0889.4
0 = Fast stop active (OFF3) 5 r0889.5
1 = Power-on disable 6 r0889.6
1 = Alarm present 7 r2139.7
1 = Speed setpoint/actual deviation in the tolerance bandwidth
(p2163, p2166)
8 r2197.7
1 = Control required to PLC 9 r0899.9
1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141, p2142) 10 r2199.1
1 = I, M, or P limit reached (p0640, p1520, p1521) 11 r1407.7
Reserved 12
0 = Alarm motor overtemperature (A7910) 13 r2129.14
Reserved 14
0 = Alarm thermal overload in power unit (A5000) 15 r2129.15
1 = Pulses enabled (inverter is clocking, drive is carrying current) r0899.11
1 = n_act ≤ p2155 r2197.1
1 = n_act > p2155 r2197.2
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed r2199.5
1 = n_act < p2161 (preferably as n_min or n=0 message) r2199.0
1 = Torque setpoint < p2174 r2198.10
1 = LOCAL mode active (control via operator panel) r0807.0
0 = Motor blocked r2198.6
1 = Ready to switch on 0 r0889.0
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 163
8.4.2.3 Digital inputs/outputs
The TM15 modules are the interface with the system I/O. These modules are used to read the
signals to the closed-loop controller. The signal status is indicated by a green LED on the front
panel. The TM15 module is equipped with 24 floating digital inputs/outputs, which are divided
into three groups of eight channels. Each group has a separate supply voltage connection
[(L1+, M1), (L2+, M2), (L3+, M3)]. This enables signals to be processed with separate
reference potentials. If a system supply voltage for monitoring signals is not available, the
signal monitoring function can be supplied by the 2P24, which is protected with a circuit-
breaker. In this case, the 0 V potential of the closed-loop controller is distributed in the system
in a star configuration. If this concept is rigorously applied, it can eliminate the risk of ground
loops.
7UDQVIRUPHU0RWRU,QVWUXPHQWDWLRQDQGFRQWURO',3BWR',3B',3BWR',3B',3BWR',3B*URXS*URXS*URXS700/0/0/303030
Figure 8-19 Potential supply of external signals
Signals are transmitted via a conducted electrical interface, which can be affected by
conducted interference. To minimize external interference, the signals are injected
asymmetrically and are floating. When this transmission method is used, the receiver
(optocoupler) receives the signal along with the reference potential from the transmitter. The
signal data is, therefore, forwarded to an optocoupler (group) via a closed loop.
The symmetrical interference is minimized by means of twisted cables (outgoing/incoming
conductors).
In general, the shield should be applied at both ends of the shield support bar.
The digital outputs of the TM15 are continued short-circuit proof. The logical status of the
outputs can be read back.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
164 Operating Instructions 04/2017
70300*URXSV7UDQVIRUPHU0RWRU,QVWUXPHQWDWLRQDQGFRQWURO
Figure 8-20 Digital signal output to the system I/O
Designation Voltage values
Rated value for output voltage (DC) 24 V
Output current per channel 0.5 A
Cumulative current of outputs (per group)
To 40° C, max. 4 A
To 50° C, max. 3 A
To 60° C, max. 2 A
8.4.2.4 Additional settings for analog outputs
Two signals are freely available for each TM31, which can be used to output the analog signals.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 165
Additional setting parameters for analog output 0 (AO0)
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4077[0] Analog outputs, characteristic value x1 -1000.00 to +1000.00%
Factory setting: 0.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4078[0] Analog outputs, characteristic value y1 -20.000 to +20.000 V or mA
Factory setting: 0.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog output 0 is set as a voltage output (p4076[0] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 3,2 are used,
the unit is V.
When analog output 0 is set as a current output (p4356[0] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522: 1,2 are used,
the unit is mA.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4079[0] Analog outputs, characteristic value x2 -1000.00 to +1000.00%
Factory setting: 100.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4080[0] y2 of the characteristic of the analog out‐
puts
-20.000 to +20.000 V or mA
Factory setting: 20.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog output 0 is set as a voltage output (p4076[0] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 3,2 are used,
the unit is V.
When analog output 0 is set as a current output (p4356[0] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522: 1,2 are used,
the unit is mA.
Additional setting parameters for analog output 1 (AO1)
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4077[1] Analog outputs, characteristic value x1 -1000.00 to +1000.00%
Factory setting: 0.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
166 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4078[1] Analog outputs, characteristic value y1 -20.000 to +20.000 V or mA
Factory setting: 0.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog output 1 is set as a voltage output (p4076[1] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 6,5 are used,
the unit is V.
When analog output 1 is set as a current output (p4356[1] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522: 4,5 are used,
the unit is mA.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4079[1] Analog outputs, characteristic value x2 -1000.00 to +1000.00%
Factory setting: 100.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4080[1] y2 of the characteristic of the analog out‐
puts
-20.000 to +20.000 V or mA
Factory setting: 20.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog output 1 is set as a voltage output (p4076[1] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 6,5 are used,
the unit is V.
When analog output 1 is set as a current output (p4356[1] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522: 4,5 are used,
the unit is mA.
Example: Changing analog output 0 from current to voltage output ± 10 V and setting the characteristic
;
Voltage output present at terminal 1, ground is at terminal 2
S>@
Set TM31.AO_type [analog output 0] to between -10 and +10
V
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. x1 to 0.00 %.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. y1 to 0.000 V.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 167
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. x2 to 100.00 %.
S>@
Set TM31.AO_char. y2 to 10.000 V.
8.4.2.5 Scaling the input signal of the analog inputs
In addition to the expanded setting options of the analog inputs, a function for scaling the input
signal is available.
Adjustable parameters of the scaling
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4057[0] Analog inputs, characteristic value x1 -20,000 to 20,000 V or mA
Default settings: 0,000 mA
Setting for the x coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog input 0 is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4) and switch S5.0 is set to "V", the unit is
V.
When analog input 0 is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3 / 5) and switch S5.0 is set to "I", the unit
is mA.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4058[0] Analog inputs, characteristic value y1 -1000.00 to 1000.00%
Default settings: 0,0 %
Setting for the y coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4059[0] Analog inputs, characteristic value x2 -20,000 to 20,000 V or mA
Default settings: 0.000 mA
Setting for the x coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
When analog input 0 is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4) and switch S5.0 is set to "V", the unit is
V.
When analog input 0 is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3 / 5) and switch S5.0 is set to "I", the unit
is mA.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
168 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Parameter Value Adjustment range
p4060[0] Analog inputs, characteristic value y1 -1000.00 to 1000.00%
Default settings: 100,00 %
Setting for the y coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
8.4.3 Monitoring functions and protective functions
The drive features hardware and software functions that protect it against faults and damage
caused by impermissible operating statuses or hardware malfunctions. The monitoring
elements provide internal microprocessor-controlled monitoring and remote device monitoring.
8.4.3.1 Insulation monitoring
The drive is operated in an ungrounded IT supply system. This means that the drive can
continue to operate if just one ground fault occurs.
Note
A second ground fault causes the drive to fail.
For safety reasons, it is necessary to detect such ground faults, in order to eliminate the risk
of electric shock on the drive. This is the reason why the drive is equipped with insulation
monitoring (A-Isometer) that continually monitors the insulation state of the drive including that
of the motor.
Only one A-Isometer can be connected to each live connected IT system. The A-Isometer
adjusts monitoring in line with the line discharge capacitance. The A-Isometer is connected
between the ungrounded line supply and the equipotential bonding conductor (PE).
For the duration of testing, disconnect the instrument cables of the A-Isometer when performing
any insulation or voltage testing on the power system.
Self-test
The A-Isometer performs an automatic self-test under the following conditions:
● When the insulation resistance of the line supply > 20 MΏ
● Every 24 hours when an output relay for the system error message has been preselected.
Terminal monitoring
The connections to mains and ground (PE) are monitored continuously. If the cables are
interrupted or not connected, or if their resistance is high, this is indicated on the LCD. In this
case, please check the terminal conductors immediately, as the insulation resistance is not
being measured properly.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 169
The insulation resistance can be > 20 MΏ in new or small IT systems. To suppress the
message, disable the connection monitoring in Setup2. The A-Isometer monitors the insulation
resistance of the drive.
The following limit values are monitored:
● Limit value 1: Insulation resistance < 500 kΩ = Signal 1 (alarm)
● Limit value 2: Insulation resistance < 100 kΩ = Signal 2 (fault)
The signals are issued to STARTER and output on the operator panel. Further information
about the wiring is contained in the circuit manual.
8.4.3.2 Tripping of the circuit-breaker in case of undervoltage
If a serious fault occurs (e.g. overload in the DC link), the drive is immediately disconnected
from the power supply by means of the safety shutdown function.
WARNING
Residual voltages
This function cannot ensure that the drive stops immediately, nor can it ensure that residual
voltages do not still exist at the output terminals and within the unit.
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
Always carefully observe the "five safety rules (Page 19)".
The shutdown of the circuit-breaker is triggered by a safety contactor combination.
The plant-side circuit-breaker must be equipped with an undervoltage trip to ensure the wire-
break protection for the circuit-breaker OFF command. If a circuit-breaker OFF command is
issued as a result of an overvoltage trip, the circuit-breaker is switched off so that it is fail-safe.
8.4.3.3 DC-link short-circuiter
The short-circuiter is triggered if an overvoltage occurs due to a serious fault and it cannot be
brought under control by opening the circuit-breaker and unlocking the pulse block of the
machine.
When the short-circuiter thyristors are triggered, the circuit-breaker is always deactivated.
Once the thyristors have been triggered, an acknowledgement signal is output to the closed-
loop control system. Fiber-optic conductors are used to control gating of the thyristors and the
acknowledgement signals.
The short-circuiter is triggered by the Power Stack Adapter.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
170 Operating Instructions 04/2017
The resistors absorb the energy stored in the DC link and limit the current. In the event of false
tripping, the torque surge for the machine, which is still rotating, is limited by the resistors.
WARNING
High voltage
If the short-circuiter is defective, this can significantly increase the discharge time.
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if
the equipment is handled improperly.
Never use force to open the doors while the DC-link capacitors are discharging.
Always observe the five safety rules in "Safety information/personnel protection" and in the
drive documentation.
8.4.3.4 Vdc-max closed-loop control
The vdc-max closed-loop control permits (restricted) braking operation of a drive with a diode
supply to the DC link. During braking operation, the machine supplies power back to the DC
link. Due to the configuration, however, a diode supply cannot supply this power back to the
line. The vdc controller controls the supply of power back from the machine to compensate for
losses from the drive system and prevent the DC link voltage from exceeding the maximum
value. This avoids any fault shutdown caused by braking ramps that have been set too short.
The drive stops controlled. The ramp-down times may increase as a result.
Adjustable parameters
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1240 Vdc_controller configuration 0 ... 3
Factory setting: 1
Setting for the controller configuration for the voltage DC link (vdc controller).
Values:
0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable vdc-max controller
The vdc-max controller increases the ramp-down times automatically to keep the DC link voltage within the permissible limits.
Parameter Function Unit
p1242 Vdc_max_controller switch-on level V
Display of the switch-on level of the vdc-max controller.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 171
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1243 Vdc_max_controller dynamic factor 10 ... 200 %
Factory setting: 100 %
Setting for the dynamic factor of the vdc-max controller.
100% means that the following parameters are used in accordance with their initial settings. The use is based on a theoretical
controller optimization.
● p1250, gain
● p1251, settling time
● p1252, derivative-action time
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be set using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251, p1252 parameters
are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1250 Vdc_controller proportional gain 0.00 ... 10.00
Factory setting: 1.00
Display of the switch-on level of the vdc-max controller.
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1251 Vdc_controller integral time 1 ... 1000 ms
Factory setting: 40 ms
Setting for the integral-action time of the vdc controller.
The effective integral time can be determined using p1243.
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1252 Vdc_controller derivative-action time 1 ... 1000 ms
Factory setting: 1 ms
Setting for the derivative-action time of the vdc controller.
The active derivative-action time can be determined using p1243.
Parameter Function Adjustment range
p1254 Vdc_max_controller automatic ON level detection 1 / 0
Factory setting: 0
Activates/deactivates automatic sensing of the switch-on level for the Vdc-max controller.
Values:
0: Automatic detection disabled.
1: Automatic acquisition enabled
Settings
Parameter p1240 functions as a release:
● 0: Controller inhibited
● 1: Controller enabled
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
172 Operating Instructions 04/2017
You use p1242 to define the starting point of the vdc-max controller. The starting point is the
maximum value of the DC link voltage that cannot be exceeded. If the DC link voltage is below
the starting point, the controller remains inactive. The controller gain can be changed by means
of p1250. The set ramp-down remains inactive while the vdc_max controller is active. The
ramp-down time increases the more excess kinetic energy is stored in the drive train.
8.4.3.5 Speed monitoring with incremental encoder
Permanent speed monitoring enables motor control without an encoder. You can upgrade with
additional incremental encoders under the following conditions:
● When high-performance applications, such as bearing control, require a permanent speed
control.
● For long-continuing applications with low speeds.
8.4.3.6 Controlled stop, EMERGENCY STOP category 1
The EMERGENCY OFF function for controlled shutdown stops the drive by means of a quick
stop process along a deceleration ramp that must be parameterized.
Note
The drive is stopped during controlled deceleration without braking modules with only a very
low % braking torque. Depending on the load machine, the ramp-down procedure may take a
long time.
Connections of the EMERGENCY STOP button
Most of the contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button are integrated in the control circuit of
the circuit-breaker. The two remaining normally-closed contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP
button are situated on the terminal block.
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Where connected
=.LA-S31:11-12
=.LA-S31:21-22
=.LA-S31:31-32
Circuit breaker con‐
trol circuit
=.LA-X11:9-10
=.LA-X11:5-6
=.LA-X11:7-8
If jumpered STOP; if not jumpered
EMERGENCY OFF (produces an
instantaneous stop command on
the circuit-breaker)
=.LA-S31:51-52 EMERGENCY STOP
customer
=.LA-X51:1, 2
=.LA-S31:61-62 Excitation equipment =.LA-X51:3, 4
Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)
You will find further information in the section "Circuit book" in your operating instructions.
Operation
8.4 Functions
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 173
8.5 Fault and system messages
8.5.1 External alarms and faults
With the terminal blocks TM15/TM31, there are 24 terminals. With STARTER or SCOUT, you
can select which predefined messages are displayed and which protection devices are to be
triggered. The list of parameterized faults and alarms can be found in the List Manual in the
"Faults and alarms" section.
8.5.2 Message from the grounding switch
Switching statuses "MPGS safe ON" and "MPGS safe OFF".
The switching status of the make-proof grounding switch is indicated to the sequencer (D435
or CU320) by the messages "MPGS safe ON" and "MPGS safe OFF" via a TM15 module.
These messages are required for displaying the status and for interlocking the circuit-breaker.
Enabling the drive
The doors of the power unit are unlocked under the following conditions:
● The serial link of "Safe On messages".
● The potential-free contacts of the make-proof grounding switch.
● The enable signal of the closed-loop/open-loop controller unlocked.
The enable signal of the closed-loop/open-loop controller is signaled when one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
● When after grounding the drive, an insulation resistance near 0 Ω is set.
● When the "Ground-fault monitoring (stator) fault status" signal has triggered.
This concept ensures a high degree of protection against residual voltages.
Check that the following prerequisites are satisfied before you switch on the drive:
● The doors are closed.
● The make-proof grounding switch is open.
● The insulation resistance is in the normal range.
If these conditions are fulfilled, you can start the drive.
Insulation monitoring
The deployed insulation monitoring device has an external delete input. This input is
interconnected in such a way that the fault messages are automatically acknowledged at the
insulation monitoring device.
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
174 Operating Instructions 04/2017
If the drive ground is removed, the insulation resistance changes from short-circuit to the
system-specific setpoint.
The fault message is acknowledged.
8.5.3 Diagnosis
8.5.3.1 Indicating and rectifying faults
The drive provides many protection functions. These protection functions protect the drive
against damage in a fault situation. A distinction is made between the following messages:
● Fault
A fault is a message from the drive indicating a fault or other exceptional (unwanted) state.
The cause can be a fault in the drive itself or also an external fault. This fault, for example,
could have been issued by the winding temperature monitoring of the asynchronous motor.
The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system. Once you
have eliminated the cause of the fault, you must acknowledge the fault message.
● Alarm
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive, that does not result in
the drive being shutdown. Alarms acknowledge themselves. If the cause is no longer
present, the alarms reset themselves automatically.
The converter indicates a fault by displaying the corresponding fault and/or alarm on the
operator panel.
Faults are displayed as follows:
● By illuminating the red LED "FAULT"
Additionally, a note relating to the cause of the alarm is displayed in the status bar of the
operator panel.
Press the <F1> "Help " key function to call up information about the cause and remedial
measures. Press the <F5> "Quitt." key to acknowledge a stored fault.
Alarms are indicated as follows:
● The yellow LED "Alarm" flashes
Additionally, a note relating to the cause of the alarm is displayed in the status bar of the
operator panel.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the fault occurred.
The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds (r0969).
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 175
8.5.3.2 Diagnostics via LEDs
Behavior of the LEDs during booting
The different statuses while booting are indicated using LEDs on the Control Unit.
● The duration of the individual statuses varies.
● If an error occurs, the booting procedure is terminated and the cause is indicated
accordingly via the LEDs.
● Once the unit has been successfully booted, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
● Once the unit has been booted, the LEDs are driven via the loaded software.
LEDs of the Power Stack Adapters
Table 8-9 LEDs of the Power Stack Adapters
LED Color Status Description; cause Remedy
PWR - Off 24 V power supply has failed or is too low
(< 14 V) or internal fuse defective.
Check input voltage.
If input voltage is > 18 V and LED off:
Return component for repair.
Red Continuous
light
24 V power supply is available (>14 V);
internal board voltage fault.
Check input voltage.
If input voltage is > 18 V and LED red:
Return component for repair.
Green Continuous
light
24 V power supply OK.
Internal board voltages OK.
--
RUN /
ERR
- Off The electronic power supply is missing
or lies outside the permissible tolerance
range.
-
Green Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation
and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication
is in progress.
-
Orange Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being es‐
tablished.
-
Red Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in the com‐
ponent.
LED is controlled irrespective of the cor‐
responding messages being reconfig‐
ured.
Remedy and acknowledge fault.
Green/red 0.5 Hz flashing
light
Firmware download in progress. -
2 Hz flashing
light
Firmware download is complete. Waiting
for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON.
Green/or‐
ange
or
Red/orange
Flashing light Component recognition via LED is acti‐
vated.
The color depends on the LED state
when component recognition is activated.
-
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
176 Operating Instructions 04/2017
LEDs of the DM10 diagnostics module
The LEDS installed on the diagnosis module indicate the logic state of the signals present
between the communication partners of the DM10 diagnosis module.
Table 8-10 LEDs of the DM10 diagnostics module
LED Communication partner Meaning: signal 1 / signal 0
H30 -X232/-X32 Control signals from PSA present / not present
H31 -X232/-X32 Control signals from PSA present / not present
H32 -X232/-X32 Control signals from PSA present / not present
H33 -X232/-X32 Control signals from PSA present / not present
H34 -X33/-X5 Binary plant signals for diagnosis on PADU8 present / not present
H35 -X33/-X5 Binary plant signals for diagnosis on PADU8 present / not present
H36 -X33/-X5 Binary plant signals for diagnosis on PADU8 present / not present
H37 -X33/-X5 Binary plant signals for diagnosis on PADU8 present / not present
H20 -X34/-X36 Internal power supply 1P24 OK / not OK
H21 -X34/-X36 Internal power supply 1N24 OK / not OK
H22 -X35/-X36 External power supply 2P24_1 and 2P24_2 OK / 2P24_1 or 2P24_2 not OK
H23 - Internal and external power supplies OK / not OK
8.5.3.3 Diagnostics via parameters
Diagnostic parameters for the device status
r0002 Drive status
Display of drive status
r0046 Missing enable signals
Display of the missing enable signals that are preventing the drive control from being commissioned
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 OFF1 enable missing No Yes
01 OFF2 enable missing No Yes
02 OFF3 enable missing No Yes
03 Enable run missing No Yes
05 External power-on inhibit active No Yes
06 Commissioning not yet complete No Yes
09 Infeed enable missing No Yes
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing No Yes
11t No start ramp-function generator No Yes
12t No setpoint enable No Yes
16 OFF1 internal enable missing No Yes
17 OFF2 internal enable missing No Yes
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 177
r0046 Missing enable signals
Display of the missing enable signals that are preventing the drive control from being commissioned
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
18 OFF3 internal enable missing No Yes
26 Drive inactive or not operational No Yes
r0050 Active command data set (CDS)
Display of the active command data set (Command Data Set, CDS)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 CDS effective, bit 0 No Yes
01 CDS effective, bit 1 No Yes
02 CDS effective, bit 2 No Yes
03 CDS effective, bit 3 No Yes
Further notes can be found in the parameter description of the p0810, p0811, p0812, p0813 and r0836 parameters in the
List Manual.
The command data set selected via binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813 is displayed via r0836.
Diagnostic parameters for digital inputs/outputs
r0721 CU digital inputs terminal actual value
Display of the actual value on the digital inputs
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 DI 0 (X122.1) Low High
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Low High
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Low High
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Low High
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Low High
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Low High
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Low High
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Low High
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed.
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
178 Operating Instructions 04/2017
r0747 CU digital outputs status
Display of the digital output status
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High
Inversion via p0748 is taken into account.
It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p0728).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4022 TM31 digital inputs status
Display of the digital input status on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Low High
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Low High
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Low High
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Low High
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Low High
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Low High
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Low High
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Low High
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4047 TM31 digital outputs status
Display of the digital output status on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) Low High
01 DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) Low High
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 179
r4047 TM31 digital outputs status
Display of the digital output status on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High
Inversion via p4048 is taken into account.
It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p4028).
DO: Digital output
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4022 TM15 digital inputs status
Display of the digital input status on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Low High
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Low High
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Low High
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Low High
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Low High
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Low High
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Low High
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Low High
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X521.4) Low High
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Low High
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Low High
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Low High
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Low High
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Low High
16 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Low High
17 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Low High
18 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Low High
19 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Low High
20 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Low High
21 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Low High
22 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Low High
23 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Low High
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r4047 TM15 digital outputs status
Display of the digital output status on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Low High
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Low High
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Low High
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
180 Operating Instructions 04/2017
r4047 TM15 digital outputs status
Display of the digital output status on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15)
Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Low High
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Low High
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Low High
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Low High
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Low High
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Low High
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Low High
10 DI/DO 10 (X521.4) Low High
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Low High
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Low High
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Low High
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Low High
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Low High
16 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Low High
17 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Low High
18 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Low High
19 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Low High
20 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Low High
21 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Low High
22 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Low High
23 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Low High
It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p4028).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 181
Operation
8.5 Fault and system messages
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
182 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Maintenance 9
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance
9.1.1 High snubber circuit capacitor voltages
WARNING
High snubber circuit capacitor voltages
The snubber circuit capacitors are not equipped with discharge resistors. The energy stored
in the capacitors is discharged via a snubber resistor and the diodes. If the connection to the
capacitor is interrupted, high voltages up to several 1000 V can result and cause an electric
shock. This can result in death, severe injuries and significant material damage.
You must always handle the capacitors as if they are charged.
Discharge the snubber circuit capacitors. Short-circuit the snubber circuit capacitors briefly
before you begin work on the converter.
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
WARNING
Improper maintenance and repairs
Improper repairs can result in death and serious physical injury.
Only qualified maintenance and installation personnel may perform repairs.
WARNING
Defective seals
When working on the device, seals at the doors, roof panels as well as front, rear and side
panels can be damaged. Operating the device with defective seals can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
Replace the defective seals before commissioning. Observe the environmental conditions
stated in the technical data.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 183
WARNING
High voltages from external supplies
Magnetizing and demagnetizing equipment that is fed from an external voltage source can
cause high voltages on the drive. This voltage can result in death or serious injury.
Ensure that no voltage from external feeds exists before commencing maintenance and repair
work.
WARNING
High voltage when the anti-condensation heating is operational
The anti-condensation heating system is used when the drive is switched off due to production
downtime or maintenance. For this reason, the heating is supplied with voltage from a
separate line supply. When the supply voltage for the anti-condensation heating is connected,
dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit, even with EMERGENCY OFF or when
the main switch is open.
This voltage can cause serious injury.
The five safety rules must be observed.
WARNING
Hot anti-condensation heating surface
When the temperature control limit value is reached the anti-condensation heating is switched
on. Once activated, the anti-condensation heating can generate a great deal of heat. Contact
can result in serious injury, such as skin burns.
● Ensure that the anti-condensation heating cannot be touched.
● Ensure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before carrying out any repair
or maintenance work.
CAUTION
Risk of falling
When climbing onto the cover of the anti-condensation heating there is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not use the anti-condensation heating system to help you get to the top of the
cabinet.
Maintenance
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
184 Operating Instructions 04/2017
NOTICE
Non-approved spare parts
Using non-approved spare parts can affect the function of the equipment and damage it. Third-
party spare parts and unapproved spare parts may not meet the requirements.
Therefore, only use spare parts that have been approved by the manufacturer.
NOTICE
Foreign bodies in the drive
If, after installation and maintenance work, foreign bodies are left in the drive, this can damage
it when switching on.
Before switching on, check as to whether there are any foreign bodies in the drive. Remove
any foreign bodies.
NOTICE
Contamination
Contamination and dirt can damage the device.
Visually inspect the equipment at least once per year. For more information, please refer to
the section "Visual inspections".
Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once
a year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations.
Note
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
environmental and operating conditions. Define maintenance intervals for the drive which
reflect your plant-specific environmental and operating conditions and meet your availability
requirements. When doing so, take the prescribed maintenance intervals into consideration,
as well as the instructions for repairing and replacing installed components.
Note
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.
Note
Inform the manufacturer about each maintenance job that has been carried out and about each
spare part replacement for the purposes of a reliability analysis.
Maintenance
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 185
9.2 Grounding the system
WARNING
High voltage after shutdown
High voltages are still present in the drive even after it has been shut down. Touching the
drive can result in death or serious injury.
Only work on the power unit if it has been sufficiently grounded. Before touching the drive,
ensure that the following parts of the power unit are de-energized:
● Internal busbars
● Input and output terminals
● Auxiliary power supply
Always observe the five safety rules (Page 19)when carrying out any work on the device.
9.2.1 Grounding with a grounding device
Use a three-pole grounding harness for fixed ball points to ground the system.
Note
Ordering a grounding harness
You can order the grounding harness. Contact the Service Center.
Note
Number of grounding harnesses
Depending on the configuration of the drive, use a sufficient number of grounding harnasses.
A grounding harness is required for each three-phase system.
Maintenance
9.2 Grounding the system
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
186 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Attaching the grounding spider
Secure the terminals of the grounding spider, first on the lower ball button ①, and then on the
upper ball buttons ②.
①Ball head in the cabinet ②Ball buttons in the motor cabinet
Figure 9-1 Grounding points
Maintenance
9.2 Grounding the system
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 187
Attaching the grounding spider
Figure 9-2 Example: Attaching the grounding spider
9.2.2 Grounding using a make-proof grounding switch
The drive is equipped with a make-proof grounding switch (in compliance with the requirements
of IEC61800-5-1, Section 4.2.13).
You can close the make-proof grounding switch when the doors are closed and only at a
voltage below 60 V. If the auxiliary voltage fails completely, the make-proof grounding switch
cannot be closed. It is not permissible that you open the doors before the make-proof grounding
switch is closed.
WARNING
DC-link short-circuit
A DC-link short-circuit can occur if grounding under voltage. This can cause injury and
material damage.
Remove the socket wrench before switching on. This activates the interlocking.
Maintenance
9.2 Grounding the system
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
188 Operating Instructions 04/2017
To close the make-proof grounding switch, proceed as follows:
1. Take the socket wrench found in the tool set.
2. Turn the socket wrench in the counterclockwise direction.
The contacts are closed and the DC-link voltage is grounded.
Figure 9-3 Make-proof-grounding switch closed
9.3 Opening the doors
The drive is equipped with a door interlocking system. Depending on the design, this is an
electromechanical door interlocking system or optionally a safety locking system.
The door of the closed-loop control cabinet is not electromechanically interlocked. For this
reason, it can also be opened during operation.
9.3.1 Opening the power unit doors for maintenance work
Opening the doors of the power unit
The doors can only be opened under the following conditions:
● The DC-link voltage is below a threshold value of 60 V.
● The circuit-breaker is open.
● The make-proof grounding switch is closed. The make-proof grounding switch is enabled
by the software.
● With synchronous motors, the field contactor must return the external enable signal at the
input with the status "OFF".
Maintenance
9.3 Opening the doors
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 189
The position of the grounding switch lever is linked with the check-back signal for the status
of the "Opened" power system breaker and the threshold value (V<Vlimit).
WARNING
High voltages
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if safety rules are not observed or if equipment
is handled improperly.
Even when the door interlocking is released, dangerous high voltages can still be present at
the auxiliary circuits (fans, anti-condensation heating, closed-loop control, etc.).
Make sure that work is only carried out by qualified personnel under due observance of the
five safety rules, the warning information in these operating instructions, and the safety
information on the product itself.
WARNING
Not activated door lock
If the door locking mechanism is not activated during operation, then the drive can be
grounded live and cause a short-circuit in the DC link. A DC-link short-circuit can result in
death, serious injury, or material damage.
Remove the grounding bar before the voltage is switched on. This then activates the
mechanical interlocking system, guaranteeing safe drive operation.
9.3.2 Manually unlocking power unit doors
If the auxiliary voltage fails, you can only unlock the doors manually. To unlock the doors,
proceed as described in the chapter titled "Preparation for use".
See also
Opening doors in preparation for use (Page 81)
Maintenance
9.3 Opening the doors
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
190 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.3.3 Secure locking system (option M10)
The doors are protected by a key transfer system.
Figure 9-4 Principle of the mechanical door interlock
①Circuit-breaker
②Coded key for the key transfer unit
③Key transfer unit
④Coded key for cabinet doors
⑤Locks for the cabinet doors
Figure 9-5 Components of the secure locking system
Maintenance
9.3 Opening the doors
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 191
Operation
1. Switch off the circuit-breaker ①. Only now can you remove the coded key ② for the key
transfer unit ③.
2. Use the key ② to unlock the keys in the key transfer unit ③.
3. Remove the keys ④ and release the locks ⑤ on the cabinet doors.
Note
The circuit-breaker cannot be closed again until the keys have been returned to the key transfer
unit, the key transfer unit has been locked, and the coded key is back in the circuit-breaker.
See also
Safety locking system (option M10) (Page 67)
9.4 Preventive maintenance
9.4.1 Inspection
The purpose of an inspection is to ascertain and evaluate the current status of the equipment.
An inspection mainly comprises visual checks. Inspections should be carried out based on a
schedule that meets the needs of the special environmental conditions at the location of use.
The following servicing and inspection instructions are used as the basis for regular inspection
of the equipment.
9.4.2 Checklist for preventive maintenance work
Maintenance Carried out by: Frequency Comments
Clean the cabinet (exterior) Operator As required Visual check, clean if required.
Clean the cabinet (interior) Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
Annually Visual check, clean if required.
Check the electrical con‐
nections (external power
and test connections) and
check the cable/screw ter‐
minals.
Operator After 1 year
and then every 4 years.
Check the cable and screw termi‐
nals regularly to ensure that they
are secure. Tighten them if nec‐
essary.
Check the internal connec‐
tions.
Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
After 1 year
and then every 4 years.
Carry out inspection and
visual check.
Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
Annually Refer to the following pages
Maintenance
9.4 Preventive maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
192 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Maintenance Carried out by: Frequency Comments
Replace the water soften‐
er / ion exchanger
Operator When required (but af‐
ter a maximum of two
years).
Replace the microfilter. Operator When the water soften‐
er is replaced.
Clean the sieve As required
Check the software. Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
Whenever parameters
are changed
and then every 5 years.
Test the insulation (test
mode for the Bender insula‐
tion measuring device)
Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
Every two years
Inspect the motor and trans‐
former.
Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
See the applicable
servicing instructions
See the specifications in the op‐
erating manual.
Check the spare parts. Siemens serv‐
ice personnel
Annually If necessary reorder spare parts
9.4.3 Visual inspections
9.4.3.1 Equipment for visual inspections
You require the following basic equipment to carry out the visual checks and maintenance
work:
● Mirror
● Flashlight
● Torque wrench for tightening screws
NOTICE
Contamination
Contamination and dirt can damage the device.
Visually inspect the equipment at least once per year. For more information, please refer to
the section "Visual inspections".
Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once
a year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations.
Note
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
environmental and operating conditions. Define maintenance intervals for the drive which
reflect your plant-specific environmental and operating conditions and meet your availability
requirements. When doing so, take the prescribed maintenance intervals into consideration,
as well as the instructions for repairing and replacing installed components.
Maintenance
9.4 Preventive maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 193
9.4.3.2 Checking the isolating clearances
● Slight, dry, non-conducting contamination is permitted.
● Remove contamination caused by dust in conjunction with high humidity.
9.4.3.3 Checking hoisting solenoids and security bolts
● Check the hoisting solenoids and security bolts at regular intervals.
● Replace defective hoisting solenoids and security bolts before (re)commissioning.
9.4.3.4 Checking the plug connections.
Regularly check the plug connections to ensure they are seated correctly and the contacts are
not corroded.
Note
The fiber-optic cables for the gating boards must be properly inserted in the connectors.
9.4.3.5 Checking the cable and screw terminals
● Check the cable and screw terminals regularly to ensure that they are secure.
● Tighten the screws if necessary. When doing this, comply with the specified torques
(Page 201).
● Check the cabling for defects.
● Replace any defective parts immediately.
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.1 Fan maintenance
CAUTION
Temperature-controlled rotating fan
If the converter is equipped with a temperature-controlled fan, the fan can run on even if the
power section is switched off.
You can be injured if you touch the fan.
Wait until the fan has shut down.
Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
194 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.5.2 Filter mats
9.5.2.1 Replacing filter mats
NOTICE
Suction of the running cabinet fans
Dust can enter the interior of the cabinet during filter mat replacement due to the suction of
the running cabinet fans. Dust deposits can damage the device.
Ensure that no dust enters the cabinet when replacing the filter mats.
1. Remove the screws for the louvered fan grid in the cabinet door.
Figure 9-6 Schematic diagram: Replacing filter mats
2. Remove the filter mat.
3. If there is a slight amount of dirt, clean the filter mat at a suitable location. Depending on
the degree of pollution, you can also clean the filter mats using a vacuum cleaner. If the
filter mat is damaged, or the frequency of alarms increases, dispose of the dirty filter mat
in the correct fashion. Use a new filter mat.
4. Insert the filter mat in the frame of the fan opening. In order that dirt is not drawn into the
converter, insert a clean mat in the same direction as it was installed before the cleaning.
5. Carefully place the louvered cover over the frame.
6. Retighten the cover screws.
Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 195
9.5.2.2 Replacing the filter mats in the roof assembly
NOTICE
Suction of the running fans
Dust can enter the interior of the cabinet during filter mat replacement due to the suction of
the running fans. Dust deposits can damage the device.
Ensure that no dust enters the cabinet when replacing the filter mats.
Figure 9-7 Changing the filter in the roof assembly
1. Release the four screws ①.
2. Release the two screws ②. Remove the filter frame.
3. Remove the filter ③.
If there is a slight amount of dirt, clean the filter mat at a suitable location. Depending on
the degree of pollution, you can also clean the filter mats using a vacuum cleaner. If the
filter mat is damaged, or the frequency of alarms increases, dispose of the dirty filter mat
in the correct fashion. Use a new filter mat
4. Place a new filter in the frame ④.
5. Reattach the frame of the filter and cover.
Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
196 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.5.3 Replacing the back-up battery of the AOP30 operator panel
Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the backup battery
Type CR2032 3V lithium battery
Manufacturer Maxell, Sony, Panasonic
Nominal capacity 220 mAh
Maximum permissible charging current 10 mA, limited to < 2 mA in the operator panel
Self-discharge at 20° C 1%/year
Service life in the backup mode > 1 year at 70° C; >1.5 years at 20° C
Service life in operation > 2 years
Replacing the backup battery
1. Switch off the main circuit-breaker.
2. Open the cabinet.
3. Disconnect the 24 VDC power supply and communications line on the operator panel.
4. Open the cover of the battery compartment.
5. Remove the old battery.
6. Insert a new battery.
7. Close the cover of the battery compartment.
8. Reconnect the 24 VDC power supply and communications line.
9. Close the cabinet.
Note
To ensure that no data is lost during a battery replacement, it must be replaced within one
minute.
If the time is exceeded, the AOP settings and input screen texts are reloaded from the
CompactFlash card by a restart of the AOP with a connection to the drive.
Set the clock to the new time.
Figure 9-8 Replacing the backup battery
Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 197
Note
Dispose of the battery in accordance with the applicable country-specific laws and regulations.
Set date and time
1. Using the "MENU" key, select the main menu of the AOP 30.
2. Using "F2", select the menu item "Commissioning/service". Confirm with "F5"
3. Using "F2", select the menu item "AOP30 settings". Confirm with "F5"
4. Using "F2", select the menu item "Set date/time". Confirm with "F5". Using "F2", select the
appropriate input location for date or time. Enter the actual value using the numerical keys.
5. Use "F5" to save the settings.
9.5.4 Load operator panel firmware, parameter and signal descriptions
As of software version V2.4, the following data is stored on the CompactFlash card of the drive:
● The AOP firmware
● The parameter and signal descriptions
● All operator panel languages
The new software version is detected during the initial activation of the AOP on a drive.
The following data is displayed:
● Firmware being loaded
Yes: Vxx.xx.xx (new software version)
No: Vxx.xx.xx (currently loaded software version)
Press the "F5" key ("Yes") on the AOP to confirm the selection of the new software version .
The firmware will be loaded. This procedure takes approx. five minutes.
Note
● While loading, do not switch off the power supply for the drive and AOP.
● If the loading process for the new firmware is not completed successfully because of a a
power outage or the connection process, the currently loaded firmware is retained. The
prompt appears at the next switch on.
● If a power outage or aborted connection occurs during the last 20 seconds of the loading
process, the AOP firmware is destroyed. In this case, reload the firmware from the product
CD via the PC with "LOAD_AOP30".
Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
198 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Reloading the firmware
1. Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30.
2. Switch on the 24 V power supply.
3. On the PC, launch the LOAD_AOP30 program.
4. Choose the PC interface (COM1, COM2).
5. Choose the firmware (AOP30.H86) and open the file.
6. Follow the instructions in the program status window. Switch on the AOP30 using the red
button (O). Loading begins.
9.6 Cleaning
9.6.1 Removing dust deposits
Remove dust deposits at least once per year. You can use an ESD brush or an ESD vacuum
cleaner. The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed.
NOTICE
Cleaning fiber-optic cables and electronic components with a damp rag
Fiber-optic cables, fiber-optic cable bundles and electronic components can be damaged if
cleaned using a damp rag.
If the components are very dusty, remove the dust using a dry, lint-free cloth. In so doing, do
not bend the fiber-optic cables.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by aggressive cleaning agents
Aggressive chemical agents can damage the electronics. This can cause the converter to
malfunction.
Never use any type of chemical agent or liquid. Only clean a very dirty converter after first
discussing the situation with service experts for the particular product.
Use a dry, clean, lint-free ESD cleaning cloth. Wipe all external parts of the rack with it. Make
sure that the dirt is not distributed, but actually removed by constant changes of the wiping
surface of the cloth. For significant levels of pollution and dirt, use an ESD cloth soaked in
ethyl alcohol (however, not so much that it drips from the cloth).
Maintenance
9.6 Cleaning
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 199
9.6.2 Cleaning aluminum parts
The surface of untreated aluminum is always covered by a thin but dense oxide skin. The
affinity of aluminum to oxygen is sufficiently strong that if the oxide skin is scratched, the metal
reacts immediately with oxygen in the air. This forms a new oxide skin. This natural oxide layer
acts as surface protection and is the reason for the good weathering resistance of aluminum
materials. In most cases, this means that additional protective measures are superfluous.
Remove very greasy layers using ethyl alcohol. If there are other heavily polluted areas, use
ESD-compliant fiber or plastic brushes to clean them.
NOTICE
Unsuitable cleaning chemicals for aluminum
Any strongly alkaline chemicals such as caustic potash or soda as well as acids corrode the
aluminum and roughen the surface. The agents often recommended for cleaning glass also
exhibit this effect and must therefore not be used on aluminum.
Only use cleaning agents that are suitable for aluminum.
NOTICE
Unsuitable cleaning utensils for aluminum
The use of unsuitable cleaning cloths and brushes may transfer metallic, corrosion-inducing
impurities onto the aluminum. This can result in corrosion damage.
● Use ESD-compliant brushes and cloths.
● Do not use cleaning cloths and brushes that have been treated with copper, brass, bronze
or other heavy metals.
● Use neither brass, bronze, or steel-wire brushes nor cloths or steel wool interwoven with
copper wire.
9.7 Repairs
WARNING
Insufficient cable insulation
Improperly laid or damaged cables and incorrectly attached cable shieldings can heat up in
places and cause fires or short-circuits wherever they make contact.
● Check whether all the cable shields are intact.
● Insulate damaged cable shields.
● Make sure that a short-circuit cannot occur on the power cables due to failure of the
insulation as a result of incorrect cable installation.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
200 Operating Instructions 04/2017
NOTICE
Drive failure
When the auxiliary power supply is switched off, data about error message statuses can be
lost. Inadequate diagnostic and error rectification measures can result in damage to the drive.
We recommend using an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). If you are unsure of the
measures necessary after the drive fails, or if a fault cannot be rectified, contact the Service
Center.
Note
Fastening the cable ducts
After performing repairs, refasten all cable ducts whose cover faces downward with a cable
tie. The cable ties must be located at the same positions as in the delivered state. You will find
more information in "Fastening the cable ducts with cable ties (Page 108)".
Note
Special investigation of defective components
You can return defective components, e.g. phase modules, PowerCards, etc. for a special
investigation. You can find more information here (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/llisapi.dll?aktprim=1&lang=en&referer=%2fWW
%2f&func=cslib.csinfo&siteid=csius&nodeid1=17218131&treeLang=de&groupid=4000002&e
xtranet=standard&viewreg=WW&objaction=csopen).
9.7.1 Torques
Table 9-2 Tightening torque for screws
Screw type Soft materials S31 Hard materials S22Hard materials S13
nm in - lb nm in - lb nm in - lb
M3 0.8 7.1 1.8 15.9 1.3 11.5
M4 1.8 15.9 3.9 34.5 3.0 26.6
M5 3.0 26.6 7.8 69.0 6.0 53.1
M6 6.0 53.1 13.0 115 10.0 88.5
M8 13.0 115 32.0 283 25.0 221
M10 25.0 221 65.0 575 50.0 443
M12 50.0 443 115.0 1020 88.0 779
M16 115.0 1020 270.0 2390 215.0 1900
1 Examples of soft materials are Cu, Al, CuZn cable entries, laminate materials, plastics, cast
resin post insulators, press nuts, welding nuts, blind rivet nuts, and cage nuts.
2 Hard materials S2 are materials with friction-enhancing washer components, e.g. a contact
washer.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 201
3 Hard S1 materials include steel, for example.
Table 9-3 Tightening torques for screw terminals for copper cables without cable lug 1)
Screw type Set screws and
headless screws
Head screws with
slit
Head screws with
hexagon profile
nm in - lb nm in - lb nm in - lb
M2 - - -
M2.5 0.25 2.2 0.5 4.4 0.5 4.4
M3 0.3 2.7 0.6 5.3 0.6 5.3
M3.5 0.5 4.4 1.0 8.9 1.0 8.9
M4 0.8 7.1 1.3 11.5 1.3 11.5
M5 1.0 8.6 2.5 22.1 2.5 22.1
M6 1.3 11.5 3.0 26.6 3.5 31.0
M8 1.8 15.9 3.9 34.5 7.2 63.7
M10 - - 4.8 42.5 13 115
M12 - - - - 18 159.3
M16 - - - - 30 265.5
Observe the tightening torques of the terminal manufacturer and the test torques according to
DIN EN 60999-1, VED 609-1
Note
Replacing the current transformer
The current transformer may only be replaced by technicians trained by Siemens.
Note
Defective door interlock system
Contact Customer Support if the door interlock system becomes defective.
See also
Service & Support (Page 229)
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
202 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.7.2 Attaching the changing device to the stacker
WARNING
Improper operation of the changing device
If the component to be replaced phase falls from the roller conveyors of the changing device,
death or serious bodily injury can result.
For your personal safety, please always follow these instructions:
● Secure the component to be replaced.
● Handle and install the changing device according to the regulations.
● Set up the drive so that it is level and horizontal.
● Secure the lifting trolley using the brake.
● Never position yourself under the component to be replaced when rolling it in and out.
Required tools
● Standard RHM 23 stacker, MLFB 6SC8476-1EA00-0AA0
● Changing device, MLFB 6SL3986-6YX00-0AA0
Procedure
1. Place the changing device on wooden beams so that the stacker can be positioned under
it.
①Bracket to secure the metal plate ②stop brackets
Figure 9-9 Attaching the changing device to the forklift truck
2. Position the stacker under the changing device, so that the base frame is resting on the
forks.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 203
3. Assemble the bracket ① to secure the base frame in place.
Figure 9-10 Attaching the changing device to the forklift truck
4. Insert the outer stop brackets ② at the points provided to prevent the component to be
replaced from rolling away.
9.7.3 Replacing the phase module
In the power unit, the power semiconductor modules (IGCT), gating boards and balancing
resistors are arranged on phase modules. A power unit comprises three phase modules. The
IGCT phase module is a replaceable unit. Its weight is 260 kg. The entire IGCT phase module
must be withdrawn from the drive so that it can be repaired.
Required tools
● A suitable, flat cooling water catchment tray with a capacity of at least seven liters for
draining the drive
● Open-ended spanner (16 mm, 18 mm, 22 mm)
● Socket spanner set
Prerequisite
Prepare the changing device as described in Section "Attaching the changing device to the
stacker (Page 203)".
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
204 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Preparation
1. Remove the electrical connections from the lifting solenoids ③.
2. Loosen the screws connecting the central brace with the frame of the cabinet, and remove
the central brace.
Figure 9-11 Lifting solenoid
Removing the cooling water
1. Place the catchment tray under the pipe union.
2. Close the inlet non-return valve ④ and the outlet non-return valve ⑤. Unscrew the water
supply and outlet pipes ⑥.
Figure 9-12 Water connection
3. Capture the cooling water (approximately 5 liters) using the catchment tank. Remove all
water from the phase module.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 205
Removing cables and screwed connections
1. Pull out the fiber-optic conductors.
2. Remove the power supply cables on the transformers.
Figure 9-13 Fiber-optic conductors and power supply cable
3. Release the screwed connections ⑦ between the phase module and the busbar package
on the rear of the IGCT phase module.
4. Remove the screwed connections for the phase connections ⑧ on the interfaces with the
IGCT phase module and the drive cabinet on the rear of the drive.
Figure 9-14 Busbar package
5. To remove the upper phase module, unscrew the motor current acquisition module.
Release the side screws ①.
Figure 9-15 Motor current acquisition module
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
206 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Mounting the busbars
1. Prior to mounting, insert the supplied long screws through the respective holes of the busbar.
2. Screw the busbars tightly in the cabinet. Note the installation position of the busbars at the
upper phase module. Unlike the installation of the busbars at the center and lower phase
module, the long end of the busbar must point forwards for the upper phase module.
Note
To allow the upper busbars to be installed, you must remove the fan.
①Long side
②Short side
Figure 9-16 Busbar
3. Fasten the phase module to the busbar.
The following figure shows the installed busbars in the dismantled state of the phase
module.
①Phase module top
②Phase module center and bottom
Figure 9-17 Installing the busbars
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 207
Lifting out the module
1. Loosen the screwed connections ⑨ between the phase module frame and the insulators.
2. Raise the IGCT phase module a few millimeters. To do so, insert a washer on the screw
in each case. To do so, insert the screws from above through the lugs ⑩ on the front and
rear of the IGCT phase module. Tighten the nuts slightly.
Figure 9-18 Insulators of the phase module and lifting lugs
3. Slide the two roller tracks under the raised frame of the IGCT phase module. Use the screws
which were previously used for the screwed connection of frame and insulators to fix the
roller tracks in place.
Figure 9-19 Changing device: roller tracks
4. Position the stacker with the pre-mounted changing device in such a way that the roller
tracks under the IGCT phase module and the roller tracks on the stacker can be screwed
together.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
208 Operating Instructions 04/2017
5. Allow the IGCT phase module to slide down the roller tracks by unscrewing the connections
on the lugs.
Figure 9-20 Changing device: joining the roller tracks
6. Pull the IGCT phase module onto the stacker. Secure the module with the two stop brackets
⑪.
Figure 9-21 Changing device: stop brackets
7. Remove the screwed connections for the roller tracks, which are now joined together.
8. Place the defective phase module down in a suitable place (e.g. on the wooden beams you
used for placing the changing device on the stacker).
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 209
9. Fasten the four eyebolts ⑫ on the phase module. Position the stacker so that you can
hang the eyelets on the fork.
Figure 9-22 Phase module (placed down)
10.Lift up the phase module and put it to one side.
11.Now lift the new phase module in the same manner from the transport packaging. Place
the phase module on the changing device.
Installing the module
1. Install the intact module in the reverse order of the previously described steps.
2. When tightening the screws, make sure that you use the appropriate torque (Page 201)
permissible for each screw type.
3. Tighten the joints between the water pipes by hand.
Performing final checks
1. Open the valves.
2. Make sure that the connections are tight.
3. Make sure that the flow is ensured once the re-cooling unit has been switched in.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
210 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
It is not necessary to vent the phase module.
Check the water level in the expansion vessel of the re-cooling unit. If necessary, add water.
You can find more detailed information on this in the chapter "Description of components" in
the "Re-cooling unit" section.
9.7.4 Replacing the diode module
The diode module is a replaceable unit. Its weight is 220 kg. The entire diode module must be
withdrawn from the drive so that it can be repaired.
Required tools
● Cooling water catchment tank for emptying the drive
● Open-ended spanner (22 mm)
Prerequisite
Prepare the changing device as described in Section "Attaching the changing device to the
stacker (Page 203)".
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 211
Removing the module
1. Loosen the screws connecting the central brace with the frame of the cabinet, and remove
the central brace.
Figure 9-23 Diode module: water connection
2. Close the inlet non-return valve ① and the outlet non-return valve ②. Unscrew the water
supply and outlet pipes ③. Capture the cooling water using the catchment tray. Remove
all water from the diode module.
Figure 9-24 Diode module: phase connections
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
212 Operating Instructions 04/2017
3. Remove the screwed connections for the phase connections ① on the interfaces with the
diode module and with the drive cabinet on the rear of the drive.
Figure 9-25 Diode module: insulators
4. Loosen the screwed connections ① between the diode module frame and the insulators.
Figure 9-26 Diode module: lugs
5. Lift the diode module by a few millimeters. To do so, insert the screws (size M16x150)
through the lugs ① on the diode module frame from above.
Figure 9-27 Changing device: roller tracks
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 213
6. Slide the two roller tracks under the raised frame of the diode module. Use the screws which
were previously used for the screwed connection of frame and insulators to fix the roller
tracks in place.
Figure 9-28 Changing device: joining the roller tracks
7. Position the stacker with the pre-mounted changing device in such a way that the roller
tracks under the diode module and the roller tracks on the stacker can be screwed together.
8. Allow the diode module to slide down the roller tracks by unscrewing the connections on
the lugs.
Figure 9-29 Changing device: stop brackets
9. Pull the diode module onto the stacker. Secure the diode module with two additional stop
brackets ①.
10.Remove the screwed connections for the roller tracks, which are now joined together.
Installing the module
1. Install the intact module in the reverse order of the previously described steps.
2. When tightening the screws, make sure that you use the appropriate torque (Page 201)
permissible for each screw type.
3. Tighten the joints between the water pipes by hand.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
214 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.7.5 Replacing the operator panel
To replace the operator panel, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the main circuit-breaker.
2. Open the cabinet.
①Power supply
②Communication cable
③Retaining lug
Figure 9-30 Replacing the operator panel
3. Disconnect the power supply ① and communication cable ② at the operator panel.
4. Press the retaining lugs ③ and withdraw the operator panel to the front.
5. Snap on a new operator panel.
6. Attach the connectors for the power supply and communications cable.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 215
9.7.6 Replacing the CompactFlash card
To replace the CompactFlash card, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the Control Unit is de-energized.
NOTICE
Destruction of the CompactFlash card
The CompactFlash card must only be inserted or removed when the power is off.
Otherwise there is a risk of data loss or damage to the card, which would prevent
commissioning of the drive.
Only remove or insert the CompactFlash card when the power is switched off.
2. Withdraw the CompactFlash card from the Control Unit. Back up the data saved on it.
3. Copy the stored data of the previous CompactFlash card to the new original Siemens card.
Note
Invalid software key
The software key is associated with the serial number of the CompactFlash card. If you
overwrite the software key of the new CompactFlash card with the previous CompactFlash
card, the new CompactFlash card is not operational.
Consequently, use the software key of the new CompactFlash card.
4. Insert the new Siemens CompactFlash card.
9.7.7 Replacing the precharging transformer
WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the precharging transformer
Replacing the precharging transformer incorrectly can result in death, serious injury, or
material damage.
● Follow "the five safety rules (Page 19)".
● Before replacing the precharging transformer, switch off the safety transformer for the
400 V infeed.
● Lift the transformer carefully because it is heavy (approx. 45 kg).
Removing the precharging transformer
1. Detach the 400 V connecting cables ①.
2. Remove the high-voltage cables ②.
3. Remove the fixing screws on the base brackets ③.
4. Remove the transformer.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
216 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Figure 9-31 Replacing the precharging transformer
Installing the precharging transformer
1. Remove the paint from at least one screw position on the base brackets. This is where the
transformer will be grounded.
2. Install the new transformer in the reverse order to when you removed it.
3. Check that the precharger is working correctly.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 217
9.7.8 Replacing the precharging rectifier
Removing modules
①Fastening nut
Figure 9-32 Replacing the precharging rectifier
1. Remove all connecting leads. If necessary, remove the cable ties.
Note
Noting the core markings
The cables are equipped with Faston connectors. Make a note of the core markings. When
installing the new module, note the core markings for the cables.
2. Remove the five plastic nuts ① of the module.
Installing a module
Install the new module in the reverse order to when you removed it.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
218 Operating Instructions 04/2017
9.7.9 Replacing the AVT combination module
Removing the AVT combination module
1. Follow "the five safety rules (Page 19)".
2. Detach the cable connections ①.
3. Remove the four fixing screws ② of the AVT combination module.
Figure 9-33 Example of an AVT combination module
Installing the AVT combination module
1. Use the screws ② to secure the AVT combination module.
2. Reconnect the control lines ①. Do not bend the fiber-optic conductors.
9.7.10 Replacing fuses
To replace the -F11, -F12 or -F21 fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the auxiliary power supply.
2. Remove the defective fuse.
3. Rectify the cause of the fault.
4. Fit the replacement fuse and close the fuse holder.
The order numbers for replacing fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 219
9.7.11 Replace the sponge for the leak detector
Principle of operation
If the sponge is dry (hard), the switch is closed.
If there is water in the drive, the sponge becomes soft and the switch opens.
①Sponge hard, switch is closed
②Sponge soft, switch is opened
Figure 9-34 Sponge
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
220 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Replacing the sponge
①Retaining screws
②Sponge
Figure 9-35 Replacing the sponge
1. Remove the retaining screws ①.
2. Take out the sponge ②.
3. Insert a new sponge and then push it up to the stop of the screw.
4. Reattach the leakage water detection.
Note
Insert the sponge
Make sure that the leakage water measurement is on the bottom pan. The distance between
sponge and bottom pan is then approx. 1 mm.
9.7.12 Replacing the Power Stack Adapter
Required tools
● Torx screwdriver Tx30
● 2.5 mm slotted screwdriver
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 221
Removing the Power Stack Adapter
1. Disconnect all fiber-optic cables at the following terminals:
– X21-X66
– X70-X79
– X81
Ensure that the disconnection is made only directly on the connector and not on the fiber-
optic cable.
2. Disconnect all DRIVE-CLiQ cables directly at the connector on terminals X200-X202.
3. Use a slotted screwdriver to remove the green connectors for the control cables at the
following terminals:
– X210
– X221/222
– X231/232
– X241/242
4. Disconnect the connectors for the control cables from the terminal strip.
5. Remove the ground connection on the Power Stack Adapter chassis.
6. Use a Torx screwdriver to loosen the four fastening screws of the Power Stack Adapter.
Do not remove the screws.
7. Push the Power Stack Adapter upwards.
8. Remove the Power Stack Adapter.
Sending in the Power Stack Adapter
You can send in the defective Power Stack Adapter for a special examination. Further
information is contained in the note "Special examination of defective components (Page 200)".
Observe the following when you send in a component:
1. Close the fiber-optic cable connectors with blanking plugs.
2. Send the defective Power Stack Adapter only in the approved packaging.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
222 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Installing the Power Stack Adapter
1. Execute the steps described in the section "Removing the Power Stack Adapter" in the
reverse order.
2. Tighten the fastening screws with a torque of 10 Nm.
3. Ensure the correct connection of the fiber-optic cables.
NOTICE
Faulty connection of fiber-optic cables
The faulty connection of the fiber-optic cables on the Power Stack Adapter can damage
the power semi-conductors.
Observe the connector assignment marked on the fiber-optic cables.
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 223
Maintenance
9.7 Repairs
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
224 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Spare parts 10
NOTICE
Non-approved spare parts
Using non-approved spare parts can affect the function of the equipment and damage it. Third-
party spare parts and unapproved spare parts may not meet the requirements.
Therefore, only use spare parts that have been approved by the manufacturer.
To request spare parts, please contact the Siemens sales office responsible for your region.
You can find an overview of the Siemens contact partners in your region here
(www.siemens.com/services/partner).
Note
Always indicate the part number and - if known - the order number (MLFB) of the spare part
required. You can find the order number as follows:
The device label is attached to or next to each component. Find out which item code the
required spare part has. The parts list supplied with the drive indicates the part number and,
where appropriate, the order number corresponding to the item code. For inquiries by e-mail,
if possible send a photograph of the product, spare part, rating plate.
Use Spares on Web (https://b2b-extern.automation.siemens.com/
spares_on_web(bD1kZSZjPTA4MCZkPW1pbg==)/default.htm) to obtain information about
spare parts for your drive.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 225
Spare parts
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
226 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Disposal 11
Observe Chapter, "Safety instructions" when carrying out any work at the converter.
11.1 Disposing of packaging material
The packing is designed in such a way as to pose the minimum risk to the environment. Some
of the packaging can be recycled.
The disposal of packaging is controlled by country-specific laws. If in doubt, ask your local
disposal specialists or contact the local authorities.
The packing material consists of the following components:
● Wooden frames
● Wooden pallets
● Polyethylene foil
● Plywood
● Plastic
● Silica gel
11.2 Removing device components and old devices
If you correctly dispose of the materials, none of the materials pollutes the environment. When
disposing or reusing, comply with the local laws and regulations.
WARNING
Improper disassembly
In the event of an improper procedure during disassembly, material can slip, tilt, and fall down.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Only specialist personnel may disassemble and dispose of device components and old
devices using appropriate protective clothing.
● Switch off the drive before you start to dismantle it. Ground the device
● With old devices, also follow the instructions in the section "Transport."
For the following components, pay special attention when disposing or reusing:
● Batteries
● Capacitors
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 227
● PCBs
● Electronic components
Disposal
11.2 Removing device components and old devices
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
228 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Service & Support A
Technical questions or additional information
If you have any technical questions or you require additional information, please contact the
Technical Support.
Please have the following data ready:
● Type
● Serial number
You can find this data on the rating plate.
Contact person
If you wish to request on-site service or order spare parts, please contact your local office. This
office will contact the responsible service center on your behalf. You can find your contact
person in the relevant contact database:
www.siemens.com/your contact
See also
Technical Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/2090)
www.siemens.com/yourcontact (www.siemens.com/yourcontact)
Siemens Support for on the move
You can obtain optimum support anywhere you go using the "Siemens Industry Online
Support” app. The app is available for Apple iOS, Android and Windows Phone.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 229
Service & Support
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
230 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Technical data and drawings B
B.1 Technical specifications
B.1.1 Notes about technical specifications
An overview of general and specific technical data of the device is provided in the following.
Further, you will find directives relating to the conditions that you must comply with when using
the described device.
B.1.2 Standards and regulations
Table B-1 Standards and conformity
Standards
Standards DIN EN 61800-3/VDE 0160 T103 (IEC 61800-3)
DIN EN 61800-4 / VDE 0160 T104 (IEC6 1800-4), however, only when referenced in the
standards DIN EN 61800-3 or DIN EN 61800-5-1
DIN EN 61800-5-1/VDE 0160 T105 (IEC 61800-5-1)
EU directives Up to April 19, 2016
2006/95/EC + amendments (Low Voltage Directive)
2004/108/EC + amendments (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
from April 20, 2016
2014/35/EU + amendments (Low Voltage Directive)
2014/30/EU + amendments (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
Certificate of compliance
with order
For the EMC Directive (2004/108/EC + amendments or 2014/30/EU + amendments)
(Product cannot be operated independently; limited distribution channel)
Interference omission This drive unit is part of a PDS, Category C4 according to DIN EN 61800-3/
VDE 0160 T103 (IEC 61800-3). The drive unit has not been designed to be connected to the
public line supply. The equipment can cause electromagnetic interference when it is connected
to the public grid. The essential requirements placed on EMC protection for the drive system
should be secured using an EMC plan at the customer site.
Insulation According to DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 (IEC 62103), IEC 61800-5-1:
Pollution degree 2 (without conductive pollution), non-condensing
Degree of protection In accordance with DIN VDE 0470 T1, EN 60 529, IEC 60 529
Protection class Class 1 according to DIN EN 61800-5-1/VDE 0160 T105 (IEC 61800-5-1)
Touch protection DIN EN 50274/VDE 0660 T514
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 231
B.1.3 Series connection variant of Basic Line Modules (option N15)
ʪ
ʪ
ʪ
Figure B-1 24-pulse supply with series connection of two Basic Line Modules
B.1.4 Connection variant: Performance enhancement through parallel operation of
three drive units
ʪ
ʪ
ʪ
ʪ
ʪ
ʪ
Figure B-2 Performance enhancement with parallel operation of three complete drive units 1); 36-pulse
supply possible
1) Requires a motor with separate winding systems.
Technical data and drawings
B.1 Technical specifications
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
232 Operating Instructions 04/2017
B.1.5 General technical specifications of the drive
Table B-2 General technical specifications
Technical specifications
Power components Diodes/IGCT
Line-side converter ● Standard: 12-pulse diode rectifier (Basic Line Module)
● Option: 24-pulse diode rectifier (Basic Line Module)
Motor-side converter Inverter (Motor Module)
Closed-loop control TRANSVEKTOR closed-loop control
Drive quadrants 2 (driving in 2 directions of rotation)
Electrical isolation of power unit/
open-loop control and closed-loop
control
Fiber-optic cables and isolating transformer
Auxiliary power supply 1-phase 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±3% and one of the following voltages:
3-phase 400 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±3%
or a different auxiliary voltage (option Y75)
Installation altitude ≤ 1000 m above sea level: 100% load-carrying capacity
> 1000 m to 400 m above sea level: current derating required
> 2000 m to 4000 m above sea level: additional voltage derating required
Current and voltage derating
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGFXUUHQW3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGLQSXWYROWDJHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK9'(,(&$VVHPEO\KHLJKWLQPDERYHVHDOHYHO$VVHPEO\KHLJKWLQPDERYHVHDOHYHOPP
Insulation Degree of contamination 2 without conductive pollution according to EN 50178 / VDE
0160 (IEC 62103), condensation not permissible
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 / VDE 0470 T1 (IEC 60529):
● Standard: IP43
● Option: -
Safety class Class 1 according to EN 61140 / VDE 0140 T1 (IEC 61140)
Touch protection BGV A3
Radio interference level According to EN 61800 3: no radio interference suppression
Paint/color Indoor requirements / light gray RAL 7035
Technical data and drawings
B.1 Technical specifications
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 233
Table B-3 Cooling
Cooling
Type of cooling Water cooling (integrated water-to-water re-cooling unit), internal circuit, deionized
water
Permissible coolant temperature (raw
water)
● Inlet: +5° C to +35° C
● Sequence: max. +40° C
Climatic environmental conditions
Table B-4 Climatic environmental conditions
Storage with suitable packag‐
ing
Transport with suitable pack‐
aging
Operation (industrial)
Ambient temperature -25° C to +70° C -25° C to +70° C 5° C to +40° C
Relative humidity 5% to 95%
(Only low condensation is
permitted. The drive must be
completely dry before com‐
missioning.)
5% to 75% 5% to 85%
(Condensation is not permit‐
ted)
Other climatic conditions ac‐
cording to class
1K3 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑1 (IEC 60721‑3‑1)
2K2 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑2 (IEC 60721‑3‑2)
3K3 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑3 (IEC 60721‑3‑3)
Pollution degree 2 without conducting contam‐
ination according to DIN EN
61800-5-1 / VDE 0160 T105
(IEC 61800-5-1)
2 without conducting contam‐
ination according to DIN EN
61800-5-1 / VDE 0160 T105
(IEC 61800-5-1)
2 without conducting contam‐
ination according to DIN EN
61800-5-1 / VDE 0160 T105
(IEC 61800-5-1)
Mechanical ambient conditions
Table B-5 Mechanical ambient conditions
Storage with suitable packag‐
ing
Transport with suitable pack‐
aging
Operation
Class 1M2 according to
DIN EN 60721‑3‑1
(IEC 60721‑3‑1)
2M2 according to
DIN EN 60721‑3‑2
(IEC 60721‑3‑2)
3M1 according to
DIN EN 60721‑3‑3
(IEC 60721‑3‑3)
Technical data and drawings
B.1 Technical specifications
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
234 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Other ambient conditions
Table B-6 Other ambient conditions
Storage with suitable packag‐
ing
Transport with suitable pack‐
aging
Operation
Biological ambient conditions
according to class
1B1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑1 (IEC 60721‑3‑1)
2B1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑2 (IEC 60721‑3‑2)
3B1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑3 (IEC 60721‑3‑3)
(without harmful flora)
Chemically active substan‐
ces according to class
1C1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑1 (IEC 60721‑3‑1)
2C1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑2 (IEC 60721‑3‑2)
3C1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑3 (IEC 60721‑3‑3)
Mechanically active substan‐
ces according to class
1S1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑1 (IEC 60721‑3‑1)
2S1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑2 (IEC 60721‑3‑2)
3S1 according to DIN EN
60721‑3‑3 (IEC 60721‑3‑3)
B.1.6 Technical specifications of the common power supply
Table B-7 Technical specifications of the common power supply
Rated voltage UErated / rated input frequency fErated: 1-phase 115 VAC / 60 Hz
1-phase 230 VAC / 50 Hz / 60 Hz
1-phase 240 VAC / 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Peak value of the rated output voltage UArated: 55 V ±3%
Rate of rise of voltage (dva/dt)max: 2 kV/μs
Rated output frequency fArated: 100 kHz ±5%
Natural convection, TEnv = 55° C, PA1Rated: 87.5 W for UERATED =
230 V
75 W for UERATED = 115 V
Rated total power output with natural convection, TEnv = 55° C,
PA1Rated:
350 W for UERATED = 230 V 300 W for UERATED =
115 V
Possible load duty cycle Transient, 60 s - 1.2 x PARated
Recovery time 30 minutes
Mean value of output current per half-period per output, IARated: 1.25 A
Peak value of output current during rated operation per output, IAmax: Approx. 6.5 A
Switch-off overcurrent limit value per output, IAoff: 10 A
Efficiency under rated conditions η > 80%
B.1.7 Technical specifications of the diagnostics module DM10
Table B-8 Technical specifications of the AD586LR reference element
Version AD586LR
Output voltage 5 V ±2.5 mV
Deviation of the output voltage for 0° C up to 70° C 5 ppm/°C
Technical data and drawings
B.1 Technical specifications
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 235
Version AD586LR
Deviation for ΔT = 25° C 100 μV/mA
Max. change of the output voltage (ΔT)max = 70° C 1.75 mV
B.2 Terminal assignments
B.2.1 Control pulpit interface (Terminal Modules TM31 and TM15)
Table B-9 Terminal assignment of customer interface TM15
Terminal module Connec‐
tor
Terminal Internal control
.HC-A31 -X520 3 DI p4022.1 → p840 ON/OFF 1
4 DI p4022.2 → p844 OFF 2
5 DI p4022.3 → p848 OFF 3
6 DI p4022.4 → p2103 Acknowledge faults
7 DI p4022.5 → Local control (AOP30/PC)
8 DI p4022.6 → p852 Enable operation
9 DI p4022.7 → p1035 MOP raise
-X521 2 DI p4022.8 → p1036 MOP lower
3 DI p4022.9 → p1020 Fixed speed setpoint bit 0
4 DI p4022.10 → p1021 Fixed speed setpoint bit 1
5 DI p4022.11 → Profibus switchover
6 DI p4022.12 → p1113 Direction reversal
7 DO p4022.13 ← r899.0 Message: Ready for switching on
8 DO p4022.14 ← r899.1 Message: Ready for operation
9 DO p4022.15 ← r899.2 Message: Operation enabled
-X522 2 DO p4022.16 ← r899.3 Message: Fault active
3 DO p4022.17 ← r899.7 Message: Alarm active
4 DO p4022.18 ← r807 Local operation
5 DO p4022.19 ← r2197.3 Drive rotating clockwise
Table B-10 Terminal assignment of customer interface TM31
Terminal module Connec‐
tor
Terminal Internal control
.HC-A31 -X521 1,2 AI p4052.0 → p1070 Main speed setpoint
3,4 AI p4052.1 → p1075 Supplementary speed setpoint
1,2 AO p4071.0 ← r0063 Actual speed value
4,5 AO p4071.1 ← Supplementary actual speed value
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
236 Operating Instructions 04/2017
B.2.2 Terminal assignment of the NAMUR terminal strip (option B00)
The NAMUR terminal strip is a standard terminal strip defined for the chemicals/
pharmaceutical industry. It is defined as follows:
Table B-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR terminal strip
Terminal No. Designation Preassignment Comments
-A1-X2 1
1.0
1.1
M Reference conductor to 24 VDC
supply
3 terminals
3
3.0
3.1
P24 24 VDC supply Protected internally with fuse (2 A)
3 terminals
10 DI ON command drive
11 DI OFF (dynamic) See .HC -A31 -X520:3.
12 DI Faster ≙ MOP raise
13 DI Slower ≙ MOP lower
14 DI RESET ≙ Acknowledge faults
15 DI Lock ≙ OFF3
16 DI Counterclockwise "0" signal for CW phase sequence
"1" signal for CCW phase sequence
≙ direction of rotation changeover
17, 18 Power disconnection External safety circuit
Circuit-breaker no OFF command
30, 31 Ready for operation Relay output (NO contact)
32, 33 Operation; motor turning Relay output (NO contact)
34 DO (COM) Fault Relay output (two-way contact)
35 DO (NO)
36 DO (NC)
50, 51 AI 0/4 mA to 20 mA Speed setpoint
60, 61 AO 0/4 mA to
20 mA
Main actual speed value
62, 63 AO 0/4 mA to
20 mA
Motor current Defaulted with motor current – can be repara‐
meterized for other variables.
See also
NAMUR terminal strip (option B00) (Page 55)
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 237
B.2.3 Circuit-breaker interface
Table B-12 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X11
Terminal Internal control
1 DI r0722.0 → p6684[0] Feedback: "Ready to start"
2 DI r0722.1 → p6686[0] Feedback: "OFF"
3 DI r0722.2 → p6685[0] Feedback: "ON"
4 DI r0722.3 → p6689[0] Feedback: "External switchoff"
Table B-13 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with OFF and undervoltage coil
Terminal Internal control
1, 2
3; 4
DO p0738 ← r6660.0 "ON" command
9 DO p0739 ← r6660.1 "OFF" command
12 DO p0740 ← r6660.2 "Undervoltage coil OFF" command
Table B-14 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with two OFF coils and undervoltage coil
Terminal Internal control
1, 2
3; 4
DO p0738 ← r6660.0 "ON" command
9 DO p0739 ← r6660.1 "OFF" command
12 DO p0740 ← r6660.2 "Undervoltage coil OFF" command
15 "OFF undervoltage coil 2" command
Table B-15 Terminal assignment for circuit-breaker interface .LA -X52 with capacitor release
Terminal Internal control
1, 2
3; 4
DO p0738 ← r6660.0 "ON" command
9 DO p0739 ← r6660.1 "OFF" command
13, 15 DO ← Tripping the circuit-breaker via the capacitor re‐
lease
14 - 17 DO Interface with capacitor release
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
238 Operating Instructions 04/2017
B.2.4 Interfaces of the Power Stack Adapter
B.2.4.1 Gating of the power semiconductors
Number Duplex fiber-optic
cable
Meaning:
Gating power semiconductors
Technical data
①X11 to X14 Inverter phase u Fiber-optic cable type: 2 mm
plastic optical fiber (POF)
Max. length of fiber-optic cable:
20 m
③X31 to X34 Inverter phase v
⑤X51 to X54 Inverter phase w
②X15 / X16 Crowbar
④X35 / X36 Braking chopper
B.2.4.2 Selecting Safe Torque Off
Interface Terminal Designation Technical data
X241 1 +24 V (internal) Relay, coil data:
● Rated voltage: 24 V DC
● Operating range: 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Relay, contact data:
● Single contact, positively driven
● Rated current: 8 A
● Rated voltage / max. switching voltage: 240/400
V AC
● Max. switching power 12 W (24 V, 500 mA)
2 Relay coil 1 (+)
3 NC contact
X242 1 M
2 Relay coil 2 (-)
3 NC contact
Note
The internal safety relay must be energized in order to operate the inverter (see Chapter
"Gating the power semiconductors"). If the option "Safe Torque Off (STO)" is not available,
this circuit function is achieved permanently by inserting jumpers between terminals 1 and 2
of the two connectors X241 and X242.
If the option "Safe Torque Off (STO)" is used, the safety relay is controlled by the two terminals
2 of connectors X241 and X242. The feedback information from the NC contact terminal 3 at
X241 and X242 is evaluated in a higher-level safety control to check the switching state.
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 239
B.2.4.3 Actual value channels
Table B-16 Power Stack Adapter 2: Actual value channels
Single fiber-optic cable Meaning, actual value acquisition Technical specifications
X70, X71 DC-link voltages Fiber-optic cable type: 2 mm
plastic optical fiber (POF)
Max. length of fiber-optic cable:
20 m
X72, X73 Output currents
X74, X75 Output voltages
X76 to X78 N.C.
X79 Voltage sensing braking chopper
B.2.4.4 Trip line
Table B-17 Power Stack Adapter 2: Trip line
Fiber-optic cable Meaning Technical data
X81
● Two PSAs Duplex fiber-
optic cable;
● > two PSAs Single fiber-
optic cable)
Trip line for direct data ex‐
change between PSAs
Fiber-optic cable type:
2 mm plastic optical fiber (POF)
Max. length of fiber-optic cable: 10 m
B.2.4.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table B-18 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Pin Signal name Technical data
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Molex, order number: 85999-3255.
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 50 m.
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
240 Operating Instructions 04/2017
B.2.4.6 Analog and digital outputs
Table B-19 Power Stack Adapter 2: Analog and digital outputs
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
X231 X232
1 M Max. output voltage:
Supply voltage at X210.3 minus approximately 2 V
Max. load current per output:
300 mA, continuously short-circuit-proof
Output delay:
● For "0" to "1": Typ. 100 μs at 0.3 A resistive load
● For "1" to "0": Typ. 10 μs at 0.3 A resistive load
2 DO 3 DO 7
3 DO 2 DO 6
4 M
5 M
6 DO 1 DO 5
7 DO 0 DO 4
8 M
9 AO 3- AO 7- Voltage range:
0 V to 10 V, short-circuit proof
Max. load current per output: 3 mA
Resolution: 12 bits
10 AO 3+ AO 7+
11 AO 2+ AO 6+
12 AO 2- AO 6-
13 AO 1- AO 5-
14 AO 1+ AO 5+
15 AO 0+ AO 4+
16 AO 0- AO 4-
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²; type: Screw terminal
B.2.4.7 Switch for the analog inputs
Table B-20 Power Stack Adapter 2: Switch for the analog inputs
Switch Function Technical specifications
S5.0 Switchover, analog input AI0:
Voltage (V)/Current (I)
Current range 0 mA to 20 mA, can be additionally
reduced to 4 mA to 20 mA via software (wire-break
monitoring);
Voltage range 0 V ... 10 V
S5.1 Switchover, analog input AI1:
Voltage (V)/Current (I)
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 241
B.2.4.8 Analog and digital inputs and temperature sensor connections
Table B-21 Power Stack Adapter 2: Analog and digital inputs and temperature sensor connections
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
X221 X222 Auxiliary voltage:
Voltage: 24 VDC
Max. total load current of + 24 V auxiliary voltage
of terminals X221 and X222 combined: See note.
Input voltage range:
- 3 V to 30 V
Typical current consumption:
10 mA at 24 VDC
Input delay:
● For "0" to "1": Max. 50 μs
● For "1" to "0": Max. 100 μs
Electrical isolation:
Reference potential is terminal MEXT1 or MEXT2
Level (including ripple):
● High signal level: 15 V to 30 V
● Low signal level: - 3 V to 5 V
1 DI 3 DI 7
2 +24 V (auxiliary voltage)
3 +24 V (auxiliary voltage)
4 DI 2 DI 6
5 DI 1 DI 5
6 +24 V (auxiliary voltage)
7 +24 V (auxiliary voltage)
8 DI 0 DI 4
9 MEXT1 (poten‐
tial-free refer‐
ence for
DI 0, DI 1,
DI 2 and DI 3)
MEXT2 (poten‐
tial-free refer‐
ence for
DI 4, DI 5,
DI 6 and DI 7)
10 M
11 AI 0 AI 1 The analog input can be switched between current
input and voltage input using the S5.0 and S5.1
switches.
Voltage: 0 V to 10 V; Ri > 100 kOhm; resolution
12 bits
Current: 0 mA to 20 mA; Ri = 250 Ohm; resolution
11 bits
12 AI 0- AI 1-
13 TEMP 0- TEMP 1- Two-wire PT100 temperature sensor
14 TEMP 0 TEMP 1
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm², type: Screw terminal
Note
Maximum load current from the 24 VDC auxiliary voltage and the digital outputs
The total load current through terminals 2, 3, 6, 7 at X221 and X222 of the 24 VDC auxiliary
voltage together with the digital outputs is protected by an internal 4 A fuse. A continuous
current of 3 A in total through this fuse must not be exceeded. In your application, dimension
the total load currents from the eight digital outputs and the terminals of the 24 VDC auxiliary
voltage accordingly.
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
242 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Note
Open input
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs to function, connect terminals MEXT1 and MEXT2. This is done
in one of the following ways:
● The incorporated ground reference of the digital inputs
● A jumper to terminal M
In this case, the isolation for these digital inputs is removed.
Note
Diagnosis when the 24 VDC auxiliary voltage fuse ruptures
The 24 VDC auxiliary voltage is protected internally by a 4 A fuse. A ruptured fuse is indicated
by loss of the auxiliary power and/or by a diagnostic message. All digital outputs are also
affected by a ruptured fuse. You will not be able to replace this fuse. Replace the component
and send it for repair.
B.2.4.9 Electronics power supply
Table B-22 Power Stack Adapter 2: Electronics power supply
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
1 Electronics ground M Voltage: 24 VDC (18 V to 31.2 V, -25% to +30%)
Power consumption (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital out‐
puts): 1 A max.
2 N.C.
3 Electronic power supply P24
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Type: Screw terminal
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 243
Technical data and drawings
B.2 Terminal assignments
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
244 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Checklists and forms C
C.1 Mechanical installation: Checklist
Logbook
Use the following checklist to guide you through the mechanical installation procedure for the
cabinet unit. Read the safety information at the start of these operating instructions before you
start working on the device.
Note
If the option in question is part of the delivery, check this accordingly in the right-hand column.
Check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities
are complete.
Item Activity Available / Completed
1 The environmental conditions must be permissible. For more information, see the "Tech‐
nical specifications" section.
If the drive and re-cooling unit are installed separately, the bottom level (switch-off level)
of the expansion tank must be located above the highest water level in the drive.
2 Connect the raw water circuit and the de-ionized water circuit. Remove any contamination
from the piping that may have occurred during shipment or storage.
3 Fill and vent the de-ionized water circuit according to the specifications. Ensure that no
air is trapped in the piping system.
4 Install the separately supplied components. Make the required mechanical and electrical
connections as well as the connection to the de-ionized water circuit.
5 The clearance around an open door (escape route) specified in the applicable accident
prevention guidelines must be observed.
6 For option M13/M78:
Select the required metric gland or PG gland appropriate for the cable cross-section.
Proivde the appropriate holes in the cover plates. When the cable is fed in from above,
ensure that enough room is available if the cable has to be bent because of the cable
feeder and cross-sections. To prevent lateral forces on the entries, insert the cable verti‐
cally.
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 245
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
Logbook
Use the checklist below to guide you through the electrical installation procedure for the drive.
Read the safety information at the start of these operating instructions before you start working
on the device.
Note
If the option in question is part of the delivery, check this accordingly in the right-hand column.
Check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities
are complete.
Item Activity Available /completed
1 If the drive is shipped in more than one transportation unit due to its dimensions, you must
also establish the electrical connections between the cabinet units as well as the mechan‐
ical connections. In addition to the power busbars, establish the electrical connection for
the signal and monitoring electronics.
2 Dimension and install the line and motor-side power cables in accordance with the ambient
and wiring conditions. Make sure that the maximum cable lengths between the drive and
motor are not exceeded.
The motor ground must be routed back directly to the cabinet unit.
The cables must be properly connected with a torque of 50 Nm to the drive terminals.
The cables for the motor and low-voltage switchgear must also be connected with the
required torques.
3 The medium-voltage switchgear is a central component of the drive protection concept.
For this reason, medium-voltage circuit-breaker control must be integrated in the drive
controller.
The medium-voltage circuit-breaker must be equipped with an undervoltage coil.
4 If the medium-voltage switchgear does not have an undervoltage coil or a UPS-supported
auxiliary-voltage supply, provide the following alternative:
● Integrated circuit-breaker (option N13) on the secondary side of the transformer
● Capacitor-release units (option N20 or N21) for the circuit-breaker.
5 Set the overcurrent protection for the medium-voltage circuit-breaker so that it protects
the system.
6 To relieve strain on the cables, they must be clamped on the cable propping bar (C-bar).
7 When EMC-shielded cables are used, screwed glands that connect the shield to ground
with the greatest possible surface area must be provided on the motor terminal box.
8 Apply the cable shields properly.
The cabinet must be properly grounded at the points provided.
9 An auxiliary supply (3-phase 380 VAC) must be provided for the auxiliary equipment (e.g.
cabinet fan / DC-link precharging). Refer to the "Technical specifications" for the drives
for details of current consumption. Protect the low-voltage feeder appropriately at the plant.
With respect to the phase sequence, make sure that fans rotate in the right direction.
Checklists and forms
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
246 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Item Activity Available /completed
10 If a voltage other than the auxiliary supply (3-phase 380 – 415 VAC) is used, a suitable
matching transformer is required (option Y75).
Ensure that the chosen taps are appropriate for the voltage present. With respect to the
phase sequence, make sure that fans rotate in the right direction.
11 The open-loop and closed-loop control systems are supplied with voltage (230 VAC 50/60
Hz) via terminals. Refer to the "Technical specifications" for the drives for details of current
consumption. If communication with the open-loop and closed-loop control system is to
be maintained even if the main voltage fails or the drive is to be switched on again auto‐
matically if the power fails, this voltage must originate from a secure network. Alternatively,
choose option L53 (UPS-supported power supply for the closed-loop control system).
12 Connection for
external auxili‐
ary equipment
(option L19)
To supply auxiliary equipment (e.g. separately-driven motor fan), the
drive must be properly connected to terminals ‑X155:1 (L1) to ‑X155:3
(L3). The supply voltage of the auxiliary equipment must match the input
voltage of the drive. The load current must not exceed 10 A and must
be set in accordance with the connected consumer.
Set value:
_________________
13 Cabinet anti-
condensation
heating (option
L55)
If the drive is equipped with option L55 (cabinet anti-condensation heat‐
ing), provide the required auxiliary voltage (V) via the terminals. Protect
the auxiliary supply with fuses on the low-voltage distribution board side.
This voltage is not integrated in the EMERGENCY STOP sequence of
the drive and is, therefore, present even when the EMERGENCY STOP
button has been actuated. These cabinet-internal cables can be easily
identified by their orange insulation.
Provide for the service power sockets in the control cabinet as well as for the optional
cabinet lighting (option L50) on the auxiliary voltage supply
230 V). Protect the auxiliary voltage supply with 10 A fuses on the plant. This voltage is
not integrated in the EMERGENCY STOP sequence of the drive and is, therefore, present
even when the EMERGENCY STOP button has been actuated. These cabinet-internal
cables can be easily identified by their orange insulation.
To supply auxiliary equipment (e.g. separately-driven fan for motor), the drive must be
properly connected to terminals (L1) to (L3). The supply voltage of the auxiliary equipment
must match the input voltage. The voltage is supplied at terminals X ... Depending on
which option (option N30 to N33) is chosen, different circuit-breakers are available with
the assigned motor circuit-breaker. When connecting the power supply, take into account
the direction of rotation of the drive. Set the motor circuit-breaker so that it protects the
drive. Protect the auxiliary supply for the auxiliary equipment (e.g. separately-driven motor
fan) with fuses on the system side. The circuit-breaker is activated by means of the "Aux‐
iliary equipment ON" command from the drive controller.
13 Drive operation by higher-level controller / control room.
Connect the control lines as specified in the interface assignment. Connect the shield.
Route the digital and analog signals with separate cables to minimize interference. Ensure
that the required distance from the power cables is maintained.
Set selector switches S5.0 / S5.1 appropriately when the analog inputs on the customer
terminal strip are used as current or voltage inputs.
Checklists and forms
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 247
Item Activity Available /completed
To supply the anti-condensation heating for the motor or the working machine, the drive
must be properly connected to terminals (L1) to (L3).
The supply voltage of the anti-condensation heating must match the input voltage. The
voltage is supplied at terminals X ... Depending on which option (option N35 to N38) is
chosen, different circuit-breakers are available with the assigned motor circuit-breaker.
Set the motor circuit-breaker so that it protects the anti-condensation heating. Protect the
auxiliary supply for the anti-condensation heating with fuses on the system side. The
circuit-breaker is activated by means of the "Auxiliary equipment OFF" command from the
drive controller.
17 Option L60
EMERGENCY
OFF category 1
(24 VDC)
The drive is fitted as standard with a category 0 STOP function and an
EMERGENCY OFF button in the control cabinet door. With option L60,
EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (decelerate at current limit) is defaulted.
If the drive is to be integrated in a central EMERGENCY STOP se‐
quence in the system-side protection concept, floating contacts are
available on terminal strip X...
Terminal X... allows other EMERGENCY OFF buttons in the system to
be looped in.
Signal connections
18 Drive operation by higher-level controller / control room.
Connect the control cables in accordance with the interface assignment and apply the
shield. Route the digital and analog signals with separate cables to minimize interference.
Ensure that the required distance from the power cables is maintained.
Note that when the analog inputs on the customer terminal strip are used as current or
voltage inputs, the isolation amplifiers ( ... ) must be set accordingly.
Connecting protection and monitoring devices
Depending on the converter transformer version (dry or oil filled), integrate the transformer
protection and monitoring devices in the alarm and shutdown train of the drive. A range
of digital inputs are available for this purpose on the customer terminal strip.
19 Options L80 to
L82
Thermistor mo‐
tor protection
unit (alarm/
shutdown)
The PTC thermistor sensors (type A PTC resistors) must be connected
to the thermistor motor protection unit ‑F at terminals T1 and T2 for
alarm/shutdown purposes.
21 Option L91
PT100 evalua‐
tion unit
The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit ‑A140
for the PT100 evaluation. The two-wire or three-wire system can be
used here to connect the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into
two groups. This must be taken into account when the evaluation is
performed (factory setting).
To check the correct wiring and macro interconnection, first select limits
below the ambient temperature and check the messages.
After checking the correct wiring and macro interconnection, set the limit
values for alarm and shutdown to match the component monitored.
Checklists and forms
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
248 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Item Activity Available /completed
22 Option L93
PT100 evalua‐
tion unit
The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit ‑A1..
for the PT100 evaluation. The two-wire or three-wire system can be
used here to connect the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into
two groups. This must be taken into account when the evaluation is
performed (factory setting).
To check the correct wiring and macro interconnection, first select limits
below the ambient temperature and check the messages.
After checking the correct wiring and macro interconnection, set the limit
values for alarm and shutdown to match the component monitored.
Option L94
PT100 evalua‐
tion unit
The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit ‑A1 for
the PT100 evaluation. The two-wire or three-wire system can be used
here to connect the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into two
groups. This must be taken into account when the evaluation is per‐
formed (factory setting).
To check the correct wiring and macro interconnection, first select limits
below the ambient temperature and check the messages.
After checking the correct wiring and macro interconnection, set the limit
values for alarm and shutdown to match the component monitored.
Option L95
PT100 evalua‐
tion unit (for use
in hazardous
areas)
The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit ‑A1 for
the PT100 evaluation. The two-wire or three-wire system can be used
here to connect the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into two
groups. This must be taken into account when the evaluation is per‐
formed (factory setting).
To check the correct wiring and macro interconnection, first select limits
below the ambient temperature and check the messages.
After checking the correct wiring and macro interconnection, set the limit
values for alarm and shutdown to match the component monitored.
Option L96
PT100 evalua‐
tion unit (for use
in hazardous
areas)
The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit ‑A1 for
the PT100 evaluation. The two-wire or three-wire system can be used
here to connect the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into two
groups. This must be taken into account when the evaluation is per‐
formed (factory setting).
To check the correct wiring and macro interconnection, first select limits
below the ambient temperature and check the messages.
After checking the correct wiring and macro interconnection, set the limit
values for alarm and shutdown to match the component monitored.
23 Differential
pressure moni‐
toring
Check the entry for parameter p0263. The setting
must not exceed 3 seconds.
1. In the infeed, select "Test operation cooling" (infeed p6650).
2. Switch on test operation via infeed p6651.
3. In the cooling system, close the main valve for the cooling water
feed to the converter. The converter must switch off with the
following fault: "F49158 cooling system: Differential pressure has
fallen below the fault threshold".
4. Reopen the valve.
5. Acknowledge the fault and switch test operation off again. ( P6651
= 0, P6650 = 0 )
Connecting Sensor Modules
Checklists and forms
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 249
Item Activity Available /completed
Option K50
Sensor Module
for detecting the
actual motor
speed
If a function for detecting the actual speed value is provided to improve
speed accuracy, connect the motor rotary pulse encoder to the SMC30
( A... ).
Option L32
Voltage Sens‐
ing Module
If, for process-related reasons, the drive needs to be restarted after
power failures of > 100 ms, connect the synchronization voltage of the
line upstream of the medium-voltage circuit-breaker to the VSM 10. To
do so, install voltage converters at the medium-voltage level, which
supply 3-phase 100 VAC as the synchronization voltage. Connect the
voltage converters on the drive side to terminals.
Switch-on conditions with water-cooled drives
Before switching on the drive for the first time, you must reduce the conductivity of the de-
ionized water circuit to < 1 µS. After filling the re-cooling unit, switch it on for several hours
before switching on the drive. The conductivity reduction may also be necessary if the
drive has been out of service for an extended period (such as maintenance/revision times).
Required tools
To install the connections, you will require:
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 10)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 13)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 16/17)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 18/19)
● Hexagon-socket spanner (size 8)
● Torque spanner, max. 50 Nm
● Screwdriver, size 2
● Screwdriver, Torx T20
● Screwdriver, Torx T30
Checklists and forms
C.2 Checklist for electrical installation
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
250 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Index
A
Actual value acquisition, 42, 240
AOP30 operator panel
Function, 116
Replacing the backup battery, 197
water sensor, 215
Auxiliary voltage
Failure of the auxiliary voltage, 38, 188, 190
Interference suppression, 100
AVT combination module, 42
B
Basic Line Module, 33
C
Cable cross section
Ground connection to the peripherals, 100
Protective ground conductor, 27
Cable cross-section
Customer terminal strips, 54
dv/dt filter, 61
Input filter, 62
Power Stack Adapter, 241, 242, 243
Cable length
DRIVE-CLiQ interface, 240
dv/dt filter, 61
Input filter, 62
Sine-wave filter, 69
Capacitor
DC link capacitor, 21, 37
DC-link capacitor, 37
dv/dt filter capacitor, 60
Filter capacitor, 62
Circuit breaker, 69
At the drive output, 65
Circuit-breaker
Crowbar, 170
Safety shutdown, 170
Undervoltage trip, 170
CompactFlash card
Loading operator panel firmware, parameter and
signal descriptions, 198
Replacing, 216
Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
Guidelines, 24
Crowbar, 32
D
Damage during transportation, 71
DC link, 34, 37, 38, 64, 170, 171
Deionized water requirements, 54
Delivery, 71
Door interlock
Castell lock, 67
Cover screw, 81
Electromechanical, 38, 67, 189
Manual, 81
Safety locking system, 67, 189
Door lock
Electromechanical, 38
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Power Stack Adapter, 40
E
Electromagnetic fields, 23
Environmental conditions, 234
F
Fiber-optic cable
Length, 240
Type, 240
Fiber-optic cables
Cleaning, 199
Length, 240
Type, 240
Filter mats, 195
Five safety rules, 19
Fuse
Miniature circuit-breaker, 43
Power Stack Adapter, 176, 242
G
Grounding
ESD shoe grounding strips, 24
Grounding concept, 27
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
Operating Instructions 04/2017 251
Grounding harness, 186
Grounding point, 98
High voltage after shutdown, 186
Insufficient grounding, 89, 104
Make-proof grounding switch, 38, 188
Make-proof grounding switch, motor operated, 64
Protective ground conductor, 27
Shield busbar, 27
Shield connection, 98
I
IGCT
Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristor, 36
L
LEDs
DM10 diagnostics module), 177
Power Stack Adapter, 176
M
Make-proof grounding switch
Function, 38
Line side, motor operated, 64
Motor side, motor operated, 64
Monitoring
Communication between the closed-loop control
and power unit, 33
Failure of the control components, 33
Internal protection functions for the control
hardware, 33
Make-proof grounding switch, 64
Monitoring functions and protective devices, 28
Residual current monitor, 23
Semiconductor failure, 33
Shock and tilt indicators, 72
Wire breakage, 241
Monitoring systems, 32
More information, 229
Motor Module, 33
O
On-site service, 229
P
Parameter categorization, 152
Parameter types, 152
Phase module
Replacing, 204
Power Stack Adapter
Actual value acquisition, 240
Function, 40
Internal fuse, 242
Precharging
Components, 38
Function, 37
Replacing the precharging transformer, 216
PROFIBUS connection
PROFIBUS, 110
Protection and monitoring functions
External components, 33
Internal components, 32
PSA
Power Stack Adapter, 36
R
Rated output frequency
Sine-wave filter, 69
Re-cooling unit
Deionized water, 22, 53, 54, 92
Deionized water specifications, 54
Inadmissible additives, 54
Principle of operation, 53
Raw water, 53
Requirements, 53
S
Safety information
Connecting the transportation units, 88
Securing the cabinet to the floor, 88
Shock and tilt indicators
Location, 73
Purpose, 72
Spare parts, 229
Contact person, 225
Spares On Web, 225
Speed limitation, 155
Storage
Drive unit, 83
General specifications, 83
Preconditions, 83
Storage duration, 84
Index
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
252 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Index
SINAMICS GM150 6SL3835-2LN44-2AA0
254 Operating Instructions 04/2017
Further Information
www.siemens.com/drives
Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
